Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 28285:c54d62415e91
Changed the type of parameter passed to the
function defined by `quickurl-format-function'. Before only the
text of the URL was passed. Now the whole URL structure is passed
and the function is responsible for extracting the parts it
requires. Changed the default of `quickurl-format-function'
accordingly.
(quickurl-insert): Changed the `funcall' of
`quickurl-format-function' to match the above change.
(quickurl-list-insert): Changed the `url' case so that it makes
use of `quickurl-format-function', previous to this the format was
hard wired.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Thu, 23 Mar 2000 13:53:14 +0000 |
parents | 0a2dc2be3dd4 |
children | 156a858432c4 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
27200 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000 |
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | |
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7 | |
8 | |
25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | |
28166 | 11 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
12 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
13 | |
14 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
15 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them. | |
16 | |
17 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 | |
18 | |
28159 | 19 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
20 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
21 this behavior. | |
22 | |
23 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte | |
24 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
25 Emacs dump core. | |
26 | |
27 ** New X resources recognized | |
27994 | 28 |
28140 | 29 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
30 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
31 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
32 | |
33 Example: | |
34 | |
28159 | 35 emacs.synchronous: true |
28140 | 36 |
27994 | 37 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
38 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
27995 | 39 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
40 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
41 visual class names are | |
27994 | 42 |
43 TrueColor | |
44 PseudoColor | |
45 DirectColor | |
46 StaticColor | |
47 GrayScale | |
48 StaticGray | |
49 | |
50 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
51 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
52 meaning. | |
53 | |
27995 | 54 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
55 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
56 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
57 visual. | |
58 | |
59 Example: | |
60 | |
28159 | 61 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
27994 | 62 |
63 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
64 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
65 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
66 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
67 | |
27995 | 68 Example: |
69 | |
28159 | 70 emacs.privateColormap: true |
27995 | 71 |
27966
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
72 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
73 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
74 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
75 |
27847 | 76 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to |
27845 | 77 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is |
27847 | 78 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can |
79 be customized. | |
27845 | 80 |
27770 | 81 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
82 | |
27473 | 83 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
84 all frames except the selected one. | |
85 | |
27369 | 86 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
87 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
88 | |
27356 | 89 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
90 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo | |
91 area or with tooltips. | |
92 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
93 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
94 read mail from the menu etc. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
95 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
96 ** Changes in Outline mode. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
97 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
98 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
99 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
100 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
101 |
27200 | 102 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
103 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
104 | |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
105 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
106 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
107 several other special buffers. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
108 |
26432
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
109 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
110 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
111 .emacs file. |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
112 |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
113 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount' |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
114 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
115 |
26417 | 116 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
117 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
118 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
119 | |
26322
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
120 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
121 is running in batch mode. For example, |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
122 |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
123 (message "%s" (read t)) |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
124 |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
125 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
126 to standard output. |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
127 |
25853 | 128 ** Faces and frame parameters. |
129 | |
130 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
131 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
132 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
133 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
134 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
135 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
136 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
137 | |
138 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
139 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
26264 | 140 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
25853 | 141 `default' face and vice versa. |
142 | |
25951 | 143 ** New face `menu'. |
144 | |
145 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
146 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
147 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
148 | |
25853 | 149 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
150 | |
151 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
152 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
153 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
154 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
155 | |
156 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
157 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
158 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
159 | |
160 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
161 `ScreenGamma'. | |
162 | |
163 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
164 | |
165 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
166 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
167 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
168 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
169 the text. | |
170 | |
171 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
172 | |
173 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
174 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
175 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
176 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
177 specify a font. | |
178 | |
179 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
180 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
181 under Lisp changes, below. | |
182 | |
183 ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | |
184 | |
185 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | |
186 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | |
187 it is hollow. | |
188 | |
189 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
190 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
191 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
192 customizing face `fringe'. | |
193 | |
194 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | |
195 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | |
196 | |
197 ** LessTif support. | |
198 | |
199 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | |
200 need a version 0.88.1 or later. | |
201 | |
202 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
203 | |
204 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
205 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
206 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
207 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
208 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
209 Emacs. | |
210 | |
211 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
212 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
213 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
214 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
215 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
216 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
217 | |
218 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
219 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
220 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
221 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
222 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
223 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
224 | |
225 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
226 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
227 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
228 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
229 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
230 | |
231 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
232 | |
233 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
234 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
235 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
236 | |
237 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
238 | |
239 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
240 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
241 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
242 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
243 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
244 whitespace. | |
245 | |
246 ** Busy-cursor. | |
247 | |
248 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | |
249 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
250 | |
251 ** Blinking cursor | |
252 | |
253 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
254 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
255 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
256 the group `cursor'. | |
257 | |
258 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
259 | |
260 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
261 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
262 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
263 details. | |
264 | |
265 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
266 have to do anything to activate it. | |
267 | |
268 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
269 | |
270 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
271 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
272 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
273 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
274 | |
275 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
276 | |
277 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
278 | |
279 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
280 | |
281 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif | |
282 one. | |
283 | |
284 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in | |
285 Motif. | |
286 | |
287 ** Hscrolling in C code. | |
288 | |
289 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically. | |
290 | |
291 ** Tool bar support. | |
292 | |
293 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
294 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | |
295 | |
296 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
297 | |
298 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
299 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
300 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
301 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
302 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
303 | |
304 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
305 | |
306 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
307 buffers. | |
308 | |
309 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
310 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
311 | |
312 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
313 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
314 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') |
25853 | 315 toggles the read-only status. |
316 | |
317 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | |
318 | |
319 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
320 | |
321 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
26652 | 322 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
25853 | 323 non-nil. |
324 | |
325 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
326 | |
327 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
328 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
329 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
330 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
331 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
332 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. | |
333 | |
334 ** Sound support | |
335 | |
336 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
337 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
338 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
339 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
340 to enable sound support. | |
341 | |
342 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
343 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
344 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
345 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
346 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
347 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
348 | |
349 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
350 | |
351 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
352 | |
353 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
354 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
355 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
356 | |
357 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
358 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
359 | |
360 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
361 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
362 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
363 | |
364 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
365 | |
366 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
367 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | |
368 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
369 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
370 | |
371 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
372 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | |
373 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
374 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
375 | |
376 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
377 notably at the end of lines. | |
378 | |
379 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
380 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
381 | |
28132 | 382 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle. |
383 | |
25853 | 384 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
385 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
386 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
387 | |
388 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
389 | |
390 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are | |
391 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is | |
392 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size | |
393 by setting the following variable: | |
394 | |
395 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
396 | |
397 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
398 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
399 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | |
400 | |
401 Default is 0.25. | |
402 | |
27017 | 403 ** Changes to hideshow.el |
404 | |
405 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block | |
406 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support. | |
407 | |
408 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
409 | |
410 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps | |
411 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying | |
412 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a | |
413 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts | |
414 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func' | |
415 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp'). | |
416 | |
417 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero, | |
418 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is | |
419 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see | |
420 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details. | |
421 | |
422 *** Isearch support for updating mode line | |
423 | |
424 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden | |
425 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the | |
426 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden | |
427 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block | |
428 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil. | |
429 | |
430 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include | |
431 something like this in your .emacs. | |
432 | |
433 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook | |
434 (lambda () | |
435 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline))) | |
436 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
437 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
438 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
439 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
440 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
441 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
442 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
443 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
444 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary. |
27005
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
445 |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
446 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
447 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
448 |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
449 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
450 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
451 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
452 a file. |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
453 |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
454 ** Changes in Font Lock |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
455 |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
456 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
457 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
458 mode. |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
459 |
26606 | 460 ** Comint (subshell) changes |
461 | |
462 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
463 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
464 | |
465 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
466 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
467 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
468 | |
469 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
470 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
471 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
472 | |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
473 ** Changes to Rmail mode |
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
474 |
27361 | 475 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
476 like `j'. | |
477 | |
27381
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
478 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
479 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
27378
af3075bcc264
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27369
diff
changeset
|
480 digest message. |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
481 |
26271 | 482 ** Changes to TeX mode |
483 | |
484 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
485 `latex-mode'. | |
486 | |
25853 | 487 ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
488 | |
489 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
490 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
491 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
492 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
493 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
494 can be edited from that buffer. | |
495 | |
496 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
497 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
498 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
499 | |
500 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
501 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
502 | |
503 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
504 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
505 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
506 been cited. | |
507 | |
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
508 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
509 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
510 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
511 in column 1 are always made leaves. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
512 |
25853 | 513 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
514 has the following new features: | |
515 | |
516 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
517 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
518 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
519 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
520 | |
521 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
522 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
523 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
524 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
525 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
526 defaults to 1. | |
527 | |
528 ** Tooltips. | |
529 | |
530 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
531 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | |
532 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
533 | |
534 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
535 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
536 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
537 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
538 | |
539 ** Customize changes | |
540 | |
541 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
26096 | 542 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
543 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
25853 | 544 |
545 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
546 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
547 default). | |
548 | |
26834
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
549 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
550 between custom options. Example: |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
551 |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
552 (defcustom default-input-method nil |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
553 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
554 This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
555 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
556 :group 'mule |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
557 :type '(choice (const nil) string) |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
558 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
559 |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
560 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
561 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
562 first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
563 |
25853 | 564 ** New features in evaluation commands |
565 | |
566 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | |
567 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
568 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
569 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
570 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
571 | |
572 ** Dired changes | |
573 | |
574 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
575 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
576 is, delete only empty directories. | |
577 | |
578 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
579 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
580 copy directories recursively. | |
581 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
582 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
583 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
584 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
585 |
25853 | 586 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
587 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
588 | |
26820 | 589 ** CC mode changes. |
590 | |
591 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
592 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
593 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
594 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
595 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
596 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
597 release. | |
598 | |
599 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. | |
600 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
601 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
602 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
603 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
604 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
605 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
606 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
607 | |
608 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
609 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
610 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
611 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
612 above. | |
613 | |
614 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
615 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
616 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
617 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
618 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
619 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
620 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
621 function documentation for more info. | |
622 | |
623 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
624 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
625 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
626 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
627 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
628 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
629 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
630 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
631 | |
632 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
633 | |
634 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
635 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
636 | |
637 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
638 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
639 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
640 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
641 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
642 style system. | |
643 | |
644 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
645 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
646 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
647 as far as possible. | |
648 | |
649 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
650 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
651 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
652 chapter about this in the manual. | |
653 | |
654 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
655 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
656 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
657 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
658 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
659 | |
660 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
661 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
662 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
663 | |
664 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
665 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
666 | |
667 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
668 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
669 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
670 inside CC Mode. | |
671 | |
672 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
673 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
674 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
675 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
676 cc-mode/). | |
677 | |
678 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
679 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
680 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
681 literals. | |
682 | |
683 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
684 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
685 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
686 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
687 this function. | |
688 | |
689 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
690 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
691 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
692 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
693 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
694 | |
695 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
696 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
697 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
698 | |
699 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
700 | |
701 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
702 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
703 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
704 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
705 | |
706 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
707 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
708 the column specified by comment-column. | |
709 | |
710 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
711 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
712 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
713 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
714 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
715 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
716 | |
717 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
718 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
719 arguments. | |
720 | |
721 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
722 | |
723 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
724 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
725 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
726 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
727 Provan). | |
728 | |
729 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
730 | |
26407 | 731 ** Isearch changes |
732 | |
733 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
25853 | 734 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
735 | |
26407 | 736 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
737 | |
26417 | 738 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
26407 | 739 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
740 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
741 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
742 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
743 `secondary-selection'. | |
744 | |
745 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
746 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
747 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
748 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
749 usual snappy response. | |
750 | |
751 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
752 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
753 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
754 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
755 | |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
756 ** Changes in sort.el |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
757 |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
758 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
27533
6dfbe5197843
A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27498
diff
changeset
|
759 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
760 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
761 numeric base. |
26407 | 762 |
28194 | 763 ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
764 | |
765 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file | |
25929 | 766 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
767 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
768 | |
28194 | 769 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
770 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
771 | |
25984 | 772 ** Shell script mode changes. |
773 | |
774 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
775 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and | |
776 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
777 | |
26264 | 778 ** Etags changes. |
779 | |
780 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
781 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
782 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
783 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
784 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
785 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
786 a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
787 |
26264 | 788 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
789 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
790 | |
791 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
792 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
26264 | 793 |
794 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
795 types. | |
796 | |
797 *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged. | |
798 | |
799 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
800 | |
801 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
802 are now tagged. | |
803 | |
804 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
805 variables are tagged. | |
806 | |
807 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
808 | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
809 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
810 for PSWrap. |
26264 | 811 |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
812 ** Changes in etags.el |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
813 |
28244 | 814 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
815 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
816 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
817 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
818 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
819 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
820 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
821 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
822 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
823 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
824 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
825 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
826 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
827 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
828 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
829 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
830 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
831 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
832 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
833 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
834 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
835 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
836 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
837 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
838 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
839 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
840 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
841 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
842 |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
843 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
844 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
845 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
846 |
26016 | 847 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
848 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14 | |
849 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is | |
850 currently no specific input method support for them. | |
851 | |
26652 | 852 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to |
853 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
854 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
855 | |
856 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
857 | |
26768 | 858 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
859 | |
25853 | 860 ** New modes and packages |
861 | |
28098 | 862 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
863 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
864 | |
865 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
866 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
867 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
868 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
869 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
870 single step. | |
871 | |
872 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
873 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
874 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
875 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
876 | |
27644 | 877 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
878 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
879 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
880 | |
27498 | 881 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
882 PostScript. | |
883 | |
884 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
885 | |
886 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
887 | |
888 ; comment (until end of line) | |
889 A non-terminal | |
890 "C" terminal | |
891 ?C? special | |
892 $A default non-terminal | |
893 $"C" default terminal | |
894 $?C? default special | |
895 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
896 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
897 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
898 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
899 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
900 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
901 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
902 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
903 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
904 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
905 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
906 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
907 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
908 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
909 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
910 | |
911 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
912 | |
27328 | 913 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
914 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
915 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
916 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
917 equal signs of assignments. | |
918 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
919 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
920 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
921 |
27016 | 922 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
923 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
924 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to | |
925 customize the package. | |
926 | |
27733 | 927 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
928 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
929 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
930 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
931 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
932 which answers different needs. | |
933 | |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
934 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
935 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
936 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
937 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
938 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
939 to be enabled. |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
940 |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
941 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
942 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
943 |
25853 | 944 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
945 | |
946 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | |
947 | |
948 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
949 | |
950 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
951 Pascal) language. | |
952 | |
953 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
954 the text at point. | |
955 | |
956 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
957 | |
25862 | 958 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
959 | |
25853 | 960 *** whitespace.el ??? |
961 | |
25992 | 962 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
963 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
964 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
965 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
966 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
967 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
968 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
969 | |
970 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
971 | |
972 Here is an example of columns: | |
973 | |
974 horse apple bus | |
975 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
976 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
977 | |
978 Doing the following settings: | |
979 | |
980 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
981 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
982 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
983 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
984 | |
985 | |
986 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
987 | |
988 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
989 | |
990 It results: | |
991 | |
992 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
993 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
994 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
995 | |
996 delim-col has the following options: | |
997 | |
998 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
999 before all columns. | |
1000 | |
1001 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
1002 between each column. | |
1003 | |
1004 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
1005 after all columns. | |
1006 | |
1007 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
1008 each column. | |
1009 | |
1010 delim-col has the following commands: | |
1011 | |
1012 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
1013 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
1014 | |
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1015 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1016 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1017 is displayed in the "Files" menu. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1018 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1019 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1020 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1021 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1022 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1023 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1024 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1025 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1026 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1027 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1028 |
26149 | 1029 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
1030 text. | |
1031 | |
26924 | 1032 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
26786 | 1033 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
1034 specific to Message mode. | |
1035 | |
26924 | 1036 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
1037 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
1038 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
1039 | |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1040 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1041 interface to access directory servers using different directory |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1042 protocols. It has a separate manual. |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1043 |
28132 | 1044 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
1045 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
1046 | |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1047 *** windmove.el |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1048 |
25853 | 1049 ** Withdrawn packages |
1050 | |
1051 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
1052 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
26133 | 1053 |
27369 | 1054 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
1055 | |
1056 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
25853 | 1057 |
1058 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
1059 | |
1060 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
1061 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
1062 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1063 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
1064 | |
28194 | 1065 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
1066 specificationa in string form as accepted my `modify-syntax-entry' to | |
1067 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' | |
1068 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
1069 | |
1070 Example: | |
1071 | |
1072 (string-to-syntax "()") | |
1073 => (4 . 41) | |
1074 | |
28166 | 1075 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
1076 other than 10. | |
1077 | |
1078 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
1079 INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
1080 | |
1081 #b1111 | |
1082 => 15 | |
1083 #b-1111 | |
1084 => -15 | |
1085 | |
1086 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
1087 | |
1088 #o666 | |
1089 => 438 | |
1090 | |
1091 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
1092 | |
1093 #xbeef | |
1094 => 48815 | |
1095 | |
1096 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
1097 | |
1098 #2R-111 | |
1099 => -7 | |
1100 #25rah | |
1101 => 267 | |
1102 | |
28037 | 1103 ** The function documentation-property now evaluates the value of |
1104 the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC | |
1105 and isn't a string. | |
1106 | |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1107 +++ |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1108 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1109 |
28149 | 1110 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1111 for a regexp in a string. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1112 |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1113 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1114 `mouse-position-function'. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1115 |
27827 | 1116 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
1117 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
1118 | |
27820 | 1119 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
1120 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
1121 | |
27770 | 1122 +++ |
1123 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
1124 returns it. | |
1125 | |
27276 | 1126 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
1127 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
1128 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1129 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1130 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1131 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1132 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1133 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1134 mode. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1135 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1136 +++ |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1137 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1138 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1139 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1140 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1141 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1142 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1143 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1144 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1145 been performed." |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1146 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1147 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1148 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1149 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1150 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1151 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1152 +++ |
26737 | 1153 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
1154 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
1155 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
1156 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1157 +++ |
26467 | 1158 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
1159 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
1160 specified table. | |
1161 | |
1162 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
1163 | |
1164 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1165 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1166 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1167 what BODY returns. |
26467 | 1168 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1169 +++ |
27693
d8bedafef8d5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27644
diff
changeset
|
1170 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
28063
f1b33463506d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28051
diff
changeset
|
1171 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1172 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1173 +++ |
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1174 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1175 removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1176 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1177 +++ |
26360
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1178 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1179 instead of being optional. |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1180 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1181 +++ |
26277
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1182 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1183 modify read-only text. |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1184 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1185 +++ |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1186 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1187 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1188 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1189 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1190 time functions like strftime. The new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1191 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1192 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1193 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1194 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1195 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1196 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1197 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1198 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1199 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1200 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1201 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1202 +++ |
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1203 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1204 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1205 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1206 start sequences. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1207 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1208 +++ |
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1209 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1210 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1211 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1212 +++ |
25853 | 1213 ** New function `propertize' |
1214 | |
1215 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
1216 strings with text properties. | |
1217 | |
1218 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
1219 | |
1220 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
1221 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
1222 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
1223 specified value of that property. Example: | |
1224 | |
1225 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
1226 | |
1227 +++ | |
1228 ** push and pop macros. | |
1229 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1230 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1231 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
25853 | 1232 as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
1233 | |
1234 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
1235 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
1236 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
1237 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1238 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1239 |
27387
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1240 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1241 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1242 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1243 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1244 Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1245 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1246 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1247 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1248 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1249 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1250 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1251 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1252 |
25853 | 1253 +++ |
1254 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | |
1255 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | |
1256 | |
1257 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
1258 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
1259 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
1260 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
1261 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
1262 space, and DEL. | |
1263 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
1264 and DEL. | |
1265 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
1266 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1267 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
1268 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
1269 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1270 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
1271 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
1272 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
1273 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
1274 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
1275 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1276 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
1277 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
1278 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
1279 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
1280 | |
1281 +++ | |
1282 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
1283 | |
1284 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
1285 | |
1286 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
1287 | |
1288 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
1289 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
1290 | |
1291 :test TEST | |
1292 | |
1293 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
1294 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
1295 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
1296 | |
1297 :size SIZE | |
1298 | |
1299 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
1300 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
1301 | |
1302 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
1303 | |
1304 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
1305 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
1306 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
1307 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
1308 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
1309 | |
1310 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
1311 | |
1312 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
1313 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
1314 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
1315 | |
1316 :weakness WEAK | |
1317 | |
1318 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. | |
1319 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if | |
1320 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the | |
1321 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
1322 | |
1323 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
1324 | |
1325 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
1326 | |
1327 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
1328 | |
1329 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
1330 | |
1331 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
1332 | |
1333 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
1334 values are shared. | |
1335 | |
1336 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
1337 | |
1338 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
1339 | |
1340 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
1341 | |
1342 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
1343 | |
1344 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
1345 | |
1346 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
1347 | |
1348 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
1349 | |
1350 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
1351 | |
1352 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | |
1353 | |
1354 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
1355 | |
1356 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
1357 | |
1358 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
1359 | |
1360 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
1361 | |
1362 Clear TABLE. | |
1363 | |
1364 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
1365 | |
1366 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
1367 not found. | |
1368 | |
26264 | 1369 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
25853 | 1370 |
1371 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
1372 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
1373 | |
1374 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
1375 | |
1376 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
1377 | |
1378 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
1379 | |
1380 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
1381 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
1382 | |
1383 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
1384 | |
1385 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
1386 | |
1387 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
1388 | |
1389 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
1390 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
26264 | 1391 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
25853 | 1392 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
1393 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
1394 | |
1395 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
1396 | |
1397 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
1398 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
1399 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
1400 | |
1401 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
1402 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
1403 | |
1404 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
1405 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
1406 | |
1407 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
1408 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
1409 | |
26264 | 1410 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
25853 | 1411 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
1412 | |
1413 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
1414 | |
1415 +++ | |
1416 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
1417 | |
1418 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
1419 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
1420 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
1421 | |
1422 +++ | |
1423 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
1424 | |
1425 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
1426 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
1427 | |
1428 +++ | |
1429 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
1430 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
1431 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
1432 is too short to reach that column. | |
1433 | |
1434 +++ | |
1435 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
1436 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
1437 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
1438 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
1439 | |
1440 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
1441 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
1442 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
1443 | |
1444 +++ | |
1445 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
1446 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
1447 | |
1448 +++ | |
1449 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
1450 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
1451 | |
1452 +++ | |
1453 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
1454 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
1455 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
1456 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
1457 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
1458 | |
1459 +++ | |
1460 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
1461 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
1462 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
1463 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
1464 | |
1465 +++ | |
1466 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
1467 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
1468 | |
1469 +++ | |
1470 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
1471 | |
1472 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
1473 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
1474 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
1475 | |
1476 +++ | |
1477 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
1478 | |
1479 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
1480 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
1481 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
1482 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
1483 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
1484 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
1485 | |
1486 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
1487 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
1488 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
1489 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
1490 | |
1491 +++ | |
1492 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
1493 | |
1494 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
1495 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
1496 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
1497 result string. | |
1498 | |
1499 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
1500 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
1501 | |
1502 Example: | |
1503 | |
1504 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
1505 (s2 "world")) | |
1506 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
1507 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
26034 | 1508 (format s1 s2)) |
25853 | 1509 |
1510 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
1511 | |
1512 +++ | |
1513 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
1514 | |
1515 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
1516 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
1517 argument in it. | |
1518 | |
1519 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
1520 (arg "world")) | |
1521 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
1522 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
1523 (message msg arg)) | |
1524 | |
1525 +++ | |
1526 ** Sound support | |
1527 | |
1528 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
1529 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
1530 | |
1531 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
1532 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
1533 to enable sound support. | |
1534 | |
1535 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
1536 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
1537 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
1538 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
1539 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
1540 | |
1541 The following sound properties are supported: | |
1542 | |
1543 - `:file FILE' | |
1544 | |
1545 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
1546 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
1547 | |
27148 | 1548 - `:data DATA' |
1549 | |
1550 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
1551 may be present, but not both. | |
1552 | |
25853 | 1553 - `:volume VOLUME' |
1554 | |
1555 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
1556 0..1. This property is optional. | |
1557 | |
1558 Other properties are ignored. | |
1559 | |
1560 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
26933 | 1561 |
1562 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
1563 a keyword symbol. | |
27145
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1564 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1565 ** Changes to garbage collection |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1566 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1567 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1568 of live and free strings. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1569 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1570 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1571 strings that have been consed so far. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1572 |
25853 | 1573 |
1574 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | |
1575 | |
1576 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
1577 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
1578 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1579 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
1580 | |
1581 ** New face implementation. | |
1582 | |
1583 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
1584 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
1585 | |
1586 +++ | |
1587 *** New faces. | |
1588 | |
1589 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
1590 | |
1591 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
26264 | 1592 |
25853 | 1593 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
1594 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
26264 | 1595 |
25853 | 1596 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
26264 | 1597 |
25853 | 1598 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
26264 | 1599 |
25853 | 1600 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
26264 | 1601 |
25853 | 1602 6. Foreground color. |
26264 | 1603 |
25853 | 1604 7. Background color. |
1605 | |
1606 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
1607 | |
1608 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
1609 | |
1610 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
1611 | |
1612 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
1613 | |
1614 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
1615 color. | |
1616 | |
1617 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
1618 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
1619 | |
1620 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
1621 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
1622 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
1623 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
1624 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | |
1625 attributes mentioned above. | |
1626 | |
1627 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
1628 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
1629 created frames. | |
26264 | 1630 |
25853 | 1631 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
1632 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
1633 `fully-specified'. | |
1634 | |
1635 +++ | |
1636 *** Face merging. | |
1637 | |
1638 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
1639 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
1640 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
1641 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
1642 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
1643 results in a fully-specified face. | |
1644 | |
1645 +++ | |
1646 *** Face realization. | |
1647 | |
1648 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
1649 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
1650 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
1651 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
1652 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
1653 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
1654 | |
1655 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
1656 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
1657 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
1658 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
1659 | |
1660 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
1661 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
1662 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
1663 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
1664 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
1665 | |
1666 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
1667 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
1668 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
1669 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
1670 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
1671 Emacs. | |
1672 | |
1673 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
1674 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
1675 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
1676 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
1677 | |
1678 ++++ | |
1679 **** Clearing face caches. | |
1680 | |
1681 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
1682 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
1683 unused fonts. | |
1684 | |
1685 +++ | |
1686 *** Font selection. | |
26264 | 1687 |
25853 | 1688 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
1689 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
1690 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
1691 | |
1692 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
1693 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
1694 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
1695 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
1696 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
1697 | |
1698 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
1699 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
1700 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
1701 | |
1702 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
1703 | |
1704 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
1705 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
1706 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
1707 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
1708 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
1709 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
1710 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
1711 | |
1712 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | |
1713 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | |
1714 face doesn't exist. | |
1715 | |
1716 +++ | |
1717 **** Scalable fonts | |
1718 | |
1719 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
1720 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
1721 servers. | |
1722 | |
1723 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
26034 | 1724 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
25853 | 1725 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
1726 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
1727 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
1728 that list. Example: | |
1729 | |
1730 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
1731 | |
1732 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
1733 | |
1734 +++ | |
1735 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
1736 | |
1737 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
1738 | |
1739 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
1740 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
1741 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
1742 | |
1743 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
1744 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
1745 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
1746 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
1747 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
1748 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
1749 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
1750 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
1751 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
1752 of the face font sort order. | |
1753 | |
26264 | 1754 - Function: x-font-family-list |
25853 | 1755 |
1756 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
1757 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
1758 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
1759 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
1760 | |
1761 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
1762 | |
1763 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
1764 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
1765 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
1766 | |
1767 +++ | |
1768 *** Setting face attributes. | |
1769 | |
1770 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
1771 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
1772 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
1773 `face-attribute'. | |
1774 | |
1775 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
1776 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
1777 | |
1778 The following attributes are recognized: | |
1779 | |
1780 `:family' | |
1781 | |
1782 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
1783 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
1784 and `?' are allowed. | |
1785 | |
1786 `:width' | |
1787 | |
1788 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
1789 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
1790 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
1791 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
1792 | |
1793 `:height' | |
1794 | |
1795 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | |
1796 1/10 pt. | |
1797 | |
1798 `:weight' | |
1799 | |
1800 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1801 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
1802 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
1803 | |
1804 `:slant' | |
1805 | |
1806 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1807 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
1808 `reverse-oblique'. | |
1809 | |
1810 `:foreground', `:background' | |
1811 | |
1812 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
1813 | |
1814 `:underline' | |
1815 | |
1816 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
1817 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
1818 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
1819 don't underline. | |
1820 | |
1821 `:overline' | |
1822 | |
1823 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
1824 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
1825 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
1826 overline. | |
1827 | |
1828 `:strike-through' | |
1829 | |
1830 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
1831 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
1832 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
1833 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
1834 | |
1835 `:box' | |
1836 | |
1837 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
1838 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
1839 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
1840 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
1841 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
1842 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
1843 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
1844 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
1845 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
1846 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
1847 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
1848 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
1849 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
1850 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
1851 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
1852 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
1853 box. | |
1854 | |
1855 `:inverse-video' | |
1856 | |
1857 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
1858 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
1859 | |
1860 `:stipple' | |
1861 | |
1862 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
1863 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
1864 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
1865 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
1866 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
1867 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
1868 | |
1869 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
1870 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
1871 | |
1872 `:font' | |
1873 | |
1874 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
1875 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
1876 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
1877 versions of Emacs. | |
1878 | |
1879 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
1880 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
1881 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
1882 | |
1883 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
1884 `defface'. | |
1885 | |
1886 *** Face attributes and X resources | |
1887 | |
1888 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
1889 from X resources: | |
1890 | |
1891 Face attribute X resource class | |
1892 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1893 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
1894 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
1895 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
1896 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
1897 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
1898 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
1899 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
1900 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
1901 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
1902 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
1903 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
1904 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
1905 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
26264 | 1906 or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
25853 | 1907 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
1908 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1909 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
1910 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
1911 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1912 | |
1913 +++ | |
1914 *** Text property `face'. | |
1915 | |
1916 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
1917 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
1918 specification can be | |
1919 | |
1920 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
1921 | |
1922 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
1923 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
1924 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
1925 for face attribute names. | |
1926 | |
1927 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
1928 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
1929 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
1930 | |
1931 +++ | |
1932 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
1933 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1934 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1935 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1936 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
25853 | 1937 default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1938 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
25853 | 1939 used to clear the mapping table. |
1940 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1941 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1942 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1943 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1944 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1945 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1946 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1947 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1948 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1949 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1950 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1951 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1952 modify their color-related behavior. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1953 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1954 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1955 any frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1956 |
27573
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1957 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1958 |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1959 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1960 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1961 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1962 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1963 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1964 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1965 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1966 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1967 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1968 |
25853 | 1969 +++ |
1970 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1971 |
25853 | 1972 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
1973 | |
1974 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | |
1975 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
1976 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
1977 | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1978 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1979 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1980 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1981 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1982 text-property. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1983 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1984 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1985 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1986 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1987 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
27144 | 1988 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
1989 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
1990 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
1991 functions. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1992 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1993 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1994 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1995 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
25853 | 1996 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1997 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1998 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1999 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2000 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2001 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2002 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2003 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2004 constrained position if that is is different. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2005 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2006 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2007 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2008 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2009 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2010 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2011 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2012 fields. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2013 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2014 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2015 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2016 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2017 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2018 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2019 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2020 - Function: erase-field &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2021 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2022 Erases the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2023 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2024 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2025 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2026 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2027 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2028 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2029 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2030 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2031 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2032 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2033 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2034 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2035 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2036 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2037 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2038 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2039 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field, |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2040 then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2041 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2042 - Function: field-string &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2043 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2044 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2045 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2046 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2047 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2048 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2049 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2050 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2051 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2052 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2053 |
25853 | 2054 +++ |
2055 ** Image support. | |
2056 | |
2057 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
2058 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
2059 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
2060 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
2061 | |
2062 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
2063 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
2064 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
2065 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
2066 area. | |
2067 | |
2068 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
2069 | |
2070 *** Image specifications | |
2071 | |
2072 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
2073 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
2074 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
26403 | 2075 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
2076 described below are ignored. | |
25853 | 2077 |
2078 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
2079 | |
2080 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
2081 | |
2082 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage | |
2083 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50. | |
2084 | |
2085 `:margin MARGIN' | |
2086 | |
26264 | 2087 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as |
25853 | 2088 margin around the image. Default is 0. |
2089 | |
2090 `:relief RELIEF' | |
2091 | |
2092 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
2093 around an image. | |
2094 | |
2095 `:algorithm ALGO' | |
2096 | |
2097 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | |
2098 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | |
2099 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | |
2100 which is intended to display images "disabled." | |
2101 | |
2102 `:heuristic-mask BG' | |
2103 | |
2104 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | |
2105 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | |
2106 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | |
2107 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | |
2108 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | |
2109 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | |
2110 background of the image. | |
2111 | |
2112 `:file FILE' | |
2113 | |
2114 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
2115 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
2116 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
2117 may be present in the image specification. | |
2118 | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2119 `:data DATA' |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2120 |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2121 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2122 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2123 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2124 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2125 |
25853 | 2126 *** Supported image types |
2127 | |
26034 | 2128 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
25853 | 2129 |
2130 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
2131 properties supported are | |
2132 | |
2133 `:foreground FG' | |
2134 | |
2135 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
2136 is the frame's foreground. | |
2137 | |
2138 `:background FG' | |
2139 | |
2140 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
2141 the frame's background color. | |
2142 | |
2143 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
2144 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
2145 instead of a `:file' property. | |
2146 | |
2147 `:width WIDTH' | |
2148 | |
2149 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
2150 | |
2151 `:height HEIGHT' | |
2152 | |
2153 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
2154 | |
2155 `:data DATA' | |
2156 | |
2157 DATA must be either | |
2158 | |
2159 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
2160 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
2161 | |
2162 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
2163 | |
2164 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
2165 bitmap. | |
2166 | |
2167 **** XPM, image type `xpm' | |
2168 | |
2169 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
2170 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
2171 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
2172 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
2173 | |
2174 Additional image properties supported are: | |
2175 | |
2176 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
2177 | |
2178 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
2179 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
2180 name. | |
2181 | |
2182 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
2183 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
2184 | |
2185 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
2186 to display compressed images. | |
2187 | |
2188 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
2189 | |
2190 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
2191 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | |
2192 defined. | |
2193 | |
2194 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
2195 | |
2196 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
27055 | 2197 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
2198 are: | |
2199 | |
25853 | 2200 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
2201 | |
2202 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
2203 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
2204 properties defined. | |
2205 | |
2206 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
2207 | |
2208 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
2209 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
2210 | |
2211 Additional image properties supported are: | |
2212 | |
2213 `:index INDEX' | |
2214 | |
2215 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
2216 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | |
2217 | |
2218 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
2219 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
2220 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
2221 every 0.1 seconds. | |
2222 | |
2223 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
2224 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
2225 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
2226 | |
2227 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
2228 (when (= idx max) | |
2229 (setq idx 0)) | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2230 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
25853 | 2231 (save-excursion |
2232 (set-buffer buffer) | |
2233 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
2234 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
2235 (insert-image img "x")) | |
2236 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
2237 | |
2238 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
2239 | |
2240 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
2241 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
2242 properties defined. | |
2243 | |
2244 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
2245 | |
2246 Additional image properties supported are: | |
2247 | |
2248 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
2249 | |
2250 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
26034 | 2251 integer. This is a required property. |
25853 | 2252 |
2253 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
2254 | |
2255 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
26034 | 2256 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
25853 | 2257 |
2258 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
2259 | |
2260 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
2261 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
2262 files. This is an required property. | |
2263 | |
2264 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
2265 lisp/gs.el. | |
2266 | |
2267 *** Lisp interface. | |
2268 | |
26264 | 2269 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
2270 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
25853 | 2271 |
2272 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
2273 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
2274 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
2275 manually. | |
2276 | |
2277 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
2278 | |
2279 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
2280 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
2281 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
2282 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
2283 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
2284 buffer. | |
2285 | |
2286 +++ | |
2287 ** Display margins. | |
2288 | |
2289 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
2290 and images. | |
2291 | |
2292 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
2293 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
2294 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
2295 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
2296 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
2297 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
2298 of the display margins. | |
2299 | |
2300 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
2301 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
2302 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
2303 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
2304 in this file). | |
2305 | |
2306 +++ | |
2307 ** Help display | |
2308 | |
2309 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
2310 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
2311 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
2312 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
2313 | |
2314 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar | |
2315 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. | |
2316 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is | |
2317 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the | |
2318 tool-bar item is used. | |
2319 | |
2320 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
2321 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the | |
2322 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
2323 | |
2324 +++ | |
2325 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
2326 | |
2327 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
2328 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
2329 | |
2330 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
2331 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
2332 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
2333 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
2334 used. | |
2335 | |
26264 | 2336 (global-set-key [A-down] |
2337 #'(lambda () | |
25853 | 2338 (interactive) |
26264 | 2339 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 2340 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
26264 | 2341 (global-set-key [A-up] |
25853 | 2342 #'(lambda () |
2343 (interactive) | |
26264 | 2344 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 2345 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
2346 | |
2347 +++ | |
2348 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
2349 | |
2350 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
2351 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
2352 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
2353 is called with one argument, POS. | |
2354 | |
2355 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
2356 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
2357 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
2358 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
2359 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
2360 | |
2361 +++ | |
2362 ** Tool bar support. | |
2363 | |
2364 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
2365 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
2366 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
2367 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
2368 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
2369 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
2370 | |
2371 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
2372 | |
2373 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
2374 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
2375 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
26264 | 2376 |
25853 | 2377 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
2378 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
2379 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
2380 property (see below). | |
26264 | 2381 |
25853 | 2382 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
2383 binding are currently ignored. | |
2384 | |
2385 The following properties are recognized: | |
2386 | |
2387 `:enable FORM'. | |
26264 | 2388 |
25853 | 2389 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
2390 or disabled. | |
26264 | 2391 |
25853 | 2392 `:visible FORM' |
26264 | 2393 |
25853 | 2394 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
26264 | 2395 |
25853 | 2396 `:filter FUNCTION' |
2397 | |
2398 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
2399 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
2400 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
26264 | 2401 |
25853 | 2402 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
2403 | |
2404 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
2405 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
26264 | 2406 |
25853 | 2407 `:image IMAGES' |
2408 | |
2409 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
2410 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
2411 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
2412 | |
2413 Index Use when item is | |
2414 ---------------------------------------- | |
2415 0 enabled and selected | |
2416 1 enabled and deselected | |
2417 2 disabled and selected | |
2418 3 disabled and deselected | |
26264 | 2419 |
25853 | 2420 `:help HELP-STRING'. |
26264 | 2421 |
25853 | 2422 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
2423 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
2424 | |
2425 *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
2426 | |
2427 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
2428 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
2429 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
2430 | |
26264 | 2431 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
25853 | 2432 raised when the mouse moves over them. |
2433 | |
2434 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
2435 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
2436 pixels. Default is 1. | |
2437 | |
2438 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
2439 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
2440 | |
2441 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
2442 | |
2443 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
26264 | 2444 a tool bar item. If |
25853 | 2445 |
2446 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
2447 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
2448 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
2449 | |
2450 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
2451 | |
2452 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
2453 | |
2454 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
2455 item. | |
2456 | |
2457 ** Mode line changes. | |
2458 | |
2459 +++ | |
2460 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
2461 | |
2462 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
2463 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
2464 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
2465 | |
2466 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
2467 a `local-map' text property. | |
2468 | |
2469 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
2470 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
2471 | |
2472 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
2473 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
2474 `local-map' property. | |
2475 | |
2476 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
2477 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
2478 example. | |
2479 | |
26359
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2480 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2481 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2482 |
25853 | 2483 +++ |
2484 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
2485 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
2486 | |
2487 +++ | |
2488 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
2489 | |
2490 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
2491 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
2492 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
2493 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
2494 line. | |
2495 | |
2496 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
2497 `header-line'. | |
2498 | |
2499 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
2500 position in the header-line. | |
2501 | |
2502 +++ | |
2503 ** Text property `display' | |
2504 | |
2505 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | |
2506 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | |
2507 `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
2508 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
2509 | |
2510 *** Variable width and height spaces | |
2511 | |
2512 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
2513 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
2514 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
2515 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
2516 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
2517 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
2518 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
2519 | |
2520 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
2521 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
2522 properties described below. | |
2523 | |
2524 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
2525 characters having the `display' property. | |
2526 | |
2527 - :width WIDTH | |
2528 | |
2529 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
2530 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
2531 | |
2532 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
2533 | |
2534 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
2535 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
2536 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
2537 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
2538 | |
2539 - :align-to HPOS | |
2540 | |
2541 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
2542 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
2543 | |
2544 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
2545 | |
2546 - :height HEIGHT | |
2547 | |
2548 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
2549 normal line height. | |
2550 | |
2551 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
2552 | |
2553 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
2554 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
2555 | |
2556 - :ascent ASCENT | |
2557 | |
2558 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
2559 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
2560 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
2561 equal to 100. | |
2562 | |
2563 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
2564 | |
2565 *** Images | |
2566 | |
2567 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
2568 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
2569 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
2570 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
2571 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
2572 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
2573 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
2574 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
2575 as display specification. | |
2576 | |
2577 *** Other display properties | |
2578 | |
2579 - :space-width FACTOR | |
2580 | |
2581 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
2582 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
2583 integer or float. | |
2584 | |
2585 - :height HEIGHT | |
2586 | |
2587 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
2588 | |
2589 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
2590 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
2591 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
2592 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
2593 a font is available counts as a step. | |
2594 | |
2595 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
2596 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
2597 | |
2598 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
2599 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
2600 | |
2601 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
2602 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
2603 | |
2604 - :raise FACTOR | |
2605 | |
2606 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
2607 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
2608 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
2609 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
2610 `:height' subproperty. | |
2611 | |
2612 *** Conditional display properties | |
2613 | |
2614 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
2615 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
2616 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
2617 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | |
2618 the text having the `display' property. | |
2619 | |
2620 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
2621 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
2622 | |
2623 +++ | |
2624 ** New menu separator types. | |
2625 | |
2626 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
2627 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
2628 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
2629 to specify other menu separator types. | |
2630 | |
2631 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
2632 | |
2633 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
2634 separator occurs. | |
2635 | |
2636 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
2637 | |
2638 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2639 | |
2640 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
2641 | |
2642 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2643 | |
2644 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
2645 | |
2646 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2647 | |
2648 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
2649 | |
2650 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2651 | |
2652 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
2653 | |
2654 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | |
2655 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
2656 | |
2657 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
2658 | |
2659 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
2660 | |
2661 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
2662 | |
2663 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2664 | |
2665 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
2666 | |
2667 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
2668 | |
2669 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
2670 | |
2671 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2672 | |
2673 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
2674 | |
2675 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
2676 | |
2677 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
2678 | |
2679 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2680 | |
2681 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
2682 | |
2683 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
2684 | |
2685 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
2686 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
2687 | |
2688 +++ | |
2689 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
2690 | |
2691 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
2692 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
2693 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
2694 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
2695 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
2696 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
2697 default foreground is black. | |
2698 | |
2699 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
2700 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
2701 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
2702 | |
2703 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
2704 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
2705 | |
2706 +++ | |
2707 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
2708 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
2709 | |
2710 --- | |
2711 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
2712 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
2713 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
2714 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
2715 the original window start. | |
2716 | |
2717 --- | |
2718 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
2719 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
2720 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
2721 | |
2722 +++ | |
2723 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
2724 | |
2725 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
2726 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
2727 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
2728 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
2729 | |
2730 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
2731 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
2732 | |
2733 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
2734 | |
2735 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
2736 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
2737 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
2738 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
2739 temporarily to nil, for example | |
2740 | |
2741 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
2742 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
2743 | |
26264 | 2744 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
25853 | 2745 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
28094
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2746 |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2747 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2748 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2749 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2750 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2751 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2752 support a vertical-bar cursor). |
26652 | 2753 ^L |
2754 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
2755 | |
2756 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
2757 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
25853 | 2758 |
2759 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2760 | |
2761 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
2762 | |
2763 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
2764 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
2765 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
2766 | |
2767 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
2768 is the one that is used. | |
2769 | |
2770 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
2771 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
2772 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
2773 separate from the command's regular output. | |
2774 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
2775 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
2776 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
2777 the buffer name. | |
2778 | |
2779 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
2780 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
2781 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
2782 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
2783 | |
2784 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
2785 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
2786 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
2787 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
2788 | |
2789 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
2790 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
2791 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
2792 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
2793 | |
2794 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
2795 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
2796 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
2797 they never ignore case. | |
2798 | |
2799 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
2800 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
2801 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
2802 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
2803 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
2804 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
2805 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
2806 | |
2807 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
2808 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
2809 | |
2810 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
2811 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
2812 | |
2813 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
2814 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
2815 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
2816 | |
2817 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
2818 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
2819 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
2820 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
2821 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
2822 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
2823 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
2824 | |
2825 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
2826 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
2827 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
2828 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
2829 | |
2830 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
2831 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
2832 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
2833 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
2834 | |
2835 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
2836 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
2837 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
2838 | |
2839 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
2840 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
2841 doesn't have any effect. | |
2842 | |
2843 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
2844 not one per buffer. | |
2845 | |
2846 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
2847 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
2848 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
2849 | |
2850 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
2851 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
2852 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
2853 | |
2854 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
2855 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
2856 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
2857 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
2858 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
2859 | |
2860 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
2861 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
2862 | |
2863 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
2864 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
2865 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
2866 | |
2867 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
2868 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
2869 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
2870 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
2871 | |
2872 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
2873 | |
2874 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
2875 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
2876 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
2877 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
2878 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
2879 | |
2880 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
2881 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
2882 | |
2883 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
2884 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
2885 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
2886 `?' on other systems. | |
2887 | |
2888 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
2889 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
2890 Unix. | |
2891 | |
2892 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
2893 current codepage when it starts. | |
2894 | |
2895 ** Mail changes | |
2896 | |
28051 | 2897 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
2898 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
2899 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
2900 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
2901 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
2902 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
2903 latin-1: | |
2904 | |
2905 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
2906 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
2907 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
2908 | |
25853 | 2909 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
2910 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
2911 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
2912 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
2913 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
2914 | |
2915 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
2916 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
2917 mail. | |
2918 | |
2919 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
2920 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
2921 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
2922 list of possible coding systems. | |
2923 | |
2924 ** CC Mode changes | |
2925 | |
2926 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
2927 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
2928 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
2929 docstring for details. | |
2930 | |
2931 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
2932 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
2933 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
2934 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
2935 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
2936 | |
2937 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
2938 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
2939 | |
2940 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
2941 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
2942 | |
2943 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
2944 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
2945 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
2946 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
2947 anonymous classes. | |
2948 | |
2949 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
2950 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
2951 | |
2952 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
2953 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
2954 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
2955 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
2956 | |
2957 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
2958 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
2959 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
2960 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
2961 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
2962 | |
2963 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
2964 | |
2965 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
2966 | |
2967 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
2968 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
2969 | |
2970 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
2971 | |
2972 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
2973 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
2974 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
2975 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
2976 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
2977 | |
2978 ** Gnus changes. | |
2979 | |
2980 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
2981 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
2982 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
2983 | |
2984 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
2985 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
2986 group, which is created automatically. | |
2987 | |
2988 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
2989 values. | |
2990 | |
2991 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
2992 | |
2993 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
2994 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
2995 | |
2996 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
2997 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
2998 | |
2999 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
3000 | |
3001 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
3002 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
3003 | |
3004 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
3005 | |
3006 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
3007 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
3008 | |
3009 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
3010 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
3011 | |
3012 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
3013 control over simplification. | |
3014 | |
3015 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
3016 | |
3017 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
3018 limit. | |
3019 | |
3020 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
3021 | |
3022 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
3023 | |
26264 | 3024 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
25853 | 3025 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
3026 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
3027 | |
3028 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
3029 `a' forces normal posting method. | |
3030 | |
3031 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
3032 -- `W d'. | |
3033 | |
3034 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
3035 to a non-nil value. | |
3036 | |
3037 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
3038 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
3039 | |
3040 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
3041 has been added. | |
3042 | |
3043 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
3044 | |
3045 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
3046 | |
3047 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
3048 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
3049 | |
3050 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
3051 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
3052 | |
3053 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
3054 | |
3055 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
3056 been added. | |
3057 | |
3058 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
3059 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
3060 | |
3061 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
3062 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
3063 | |
3064 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
3065 | |
3066 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
3067 | |
3068 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
3069 | |
3070 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
3071 | |
3072 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
3073 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
3074 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
3075 | |
3076 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
3077 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
3078 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
3079 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
3080 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
3081 | |
3082 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
3083 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
3084 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
3085 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
3086 | |
3087 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
3088 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
3089 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
3090 mismatch. | |
3091 | |
3092 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3093 | |
3094 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
3095 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
3096 | |
3097 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
3098 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
3099 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
3100 removed from the label. | |
3101 | |
3102 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
3103 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
3104 | |
3105 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
3106 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
3107 | |
3108 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
3109 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
26264 | 3110 expressions. |
25853 | 3111 |
3112 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
3113 | |
3114 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
3115 | |
3116 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
3117 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
3118 | |
3119 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
3120 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
3121 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
3122 | |
3123 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
3124 changes with a special face. | |
3125 | |
3126 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
3127 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
3128 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
3129 | |
3130 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
3131 | |
3132 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
3133 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
3134 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
3135 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
3136 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
3137 | |
3138 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
3139 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
3140 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
3141 | |
3142 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
3143 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
3144 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
3145 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
3146 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
3147 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
3148 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
3149 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
3150 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
3151 | |
3152 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
3153 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
3154 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
3155 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
3156 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
3157 program. | |
3158 | |
3159 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
3160 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
3161 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
3162 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
3163 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
3164 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
3165 | |
3166 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
3167 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
3168 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
3169 was not documented clearly before. | |
3170 | |
3171 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
3172 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
3173 | |
3174 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
3175 | |
3176 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
3177 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
3178 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
3179 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
3180 | |
3181 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
3182 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
3183 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
3184 | |
3185 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
3186 | |
3187 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
3188 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
3189 | |
3190 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
3191 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
3192 integers. | |
3193 | |
3194 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
3195 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
3196 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
3197 file names and attributes are returned. | |
3198 | |
3199 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
3200 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
3201 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | |
3202 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
3203 returns the result. | |
3204 | |
3205 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
3206 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
3207 | |
3208 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
3209 | |
3210 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
3211 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
3212 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
3213 optionally. | |
3214 | |
3215 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
3216 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
3217 | |
3218 ** | |
3219 The new function process-running-child-p | |
3220 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
3221 terminal to its own child process. | |
3222 | |
3223 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
3224 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
3225 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
3226 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
3227 | |
3228 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
3229 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
3230 | |
3231 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
3232 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
3233 | |
3234 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
3235 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
3236 to move or copy menu entries. | |
3237 | |
3238 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
3239 | |
3240 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
3241 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
3242 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
3243 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
3244 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
3245 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
3246 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
3247 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
3248 | |
3249 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
3250 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
3251 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
3252 | |
3253 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
3254 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
3255 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
3256 | |
3257 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | |
3258 | |
3259 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
3260 across the boundary. | |
3261 | |
3262 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
3263 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
3264 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
3265 contains 8-bit characters. | |
3266 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
3267 contains invalid characters. | |
3268 | |
3269 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
3270 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
3271 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
3272 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
3273 way. | |
3274 | |
3275 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
3276 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
3277 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
3278 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
3279 | |
3280 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
3281 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
3282 | |
3283 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
3284 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
3285 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
3286 menus should always use the third argument. | |
3287 | |
3288 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
3289 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
3290 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
3291 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
3292 | |
3293 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
3294 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
3295 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
3296 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
3297 | |
3298 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
3299 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
3300 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
3301 echo area contents. | |
3302 | |
3303 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
3304 | |
3305 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
3306 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
3307 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
3308 | |
3309 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
3310 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
26264 | 3311 means to clear out that attribute. |
25853 | 3312 |
3313 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
3314 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
3315 | |
3316 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
3317 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
3318 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
3319 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
3320 | |
3321 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
3322 the gap of the current buffer. | |
3323 | |
3324 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
3325 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
3326 current buffer. | |
3327 | |
3328 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
3329 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
3330 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
3331 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
3332 | |
3333 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
3334 | |
3335 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
3336 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
3337 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
3338 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
3339 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
3340 | |
3341 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
3342 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
3343 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
3344 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
3345 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
3346 | |
3347 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
3348 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
3349 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
3350 | |
3351 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
3352 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
3353 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
3354 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
3355 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
3356 results. | |
3357 | |
3358 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
3359 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
3360 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
3361 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
3362 | |
3363 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
3364 | |
3365 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
3366 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
3367 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
3368 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
3369 | |
3370 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
3371 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
3372 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
3373 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
3374 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
3375 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
3376 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
3377 region. | |
3378 | |
3379 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
3380 selective undo. | |
3381 | |
3382 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
3383 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
3384 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
3385 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
3386 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
3387 | |
3388 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
3389 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
3390 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
3391 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
3392 | |
3393 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
3394 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
3395 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
3396 something that most users not do. | |
3397 | |
3398 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
3399 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
3400 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
3401 applications. | |
3402 | |
3403 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
3404 pasting operations. | |
3405 | |
3406 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
3407 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
3408 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
3409 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
3410 `ps-printer-name'. | |
3411 | |
3412 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
3413 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
3414 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
3415 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
3416 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
3417 hits a new word. | |
3418 | |
3419 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
3420 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
3421 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
3422 | |
3423 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
3424 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
3425 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
3426 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
3427 | |
3428 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
3429 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
3430 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
3431 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
3432 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
3433 | |
3434 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
3435 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
3436 | |
3437 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
3438 | |
3439 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
3440 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
3441 respectively. | |
3442 | |
3443 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
3444 | |
3445 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
3446 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
3447 | |
3448 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
3449 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
3450 | |
3451 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
3452 | |
3453 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
3454 | |
3455 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
3456 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
3457 | |
3458 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
26264 | 3459 given in the following case: |
25853 | 3460 o When you are using a complex input method. |
3461 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
3462 | |
3463 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
3464 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
3465 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
3466 setting it to t is helpful. | |
3467 | |
3468 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
3469 | |
3470 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
3471 keys: | |
3472 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
3473 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
3474 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
3475 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
3476 environment. | |
3477 | |
3478 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
3479 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
3480 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
3481 get | |
3482 | |
3483 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
3484 | |
3485 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
3486 | |
3487 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
3488 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
3489 | |
3490 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
3491 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
3492 its owner and group. | |
3493 | |
3494 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
3495 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
3496 | |
3497 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
3498 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
3499 | |
3500 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
3501 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
3502 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
3503 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
3504 | |
3505 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
3506 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
3507 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
3508 for writing keyboard macros. | |
3509 | |
3510 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
3511 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
3512 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
3513 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
3514 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
3515 info. | |
3516 | |
3517 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
3518 | |
3519 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
3520 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
3521 contents only. | |
3522 | |
3523 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
3524 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
3525 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
3526 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
3527 | |
3528 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
3529 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
3530 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
3531 | |
3532 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
3533 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
3534 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
3535 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
3536 | |
3537 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
3538 failure if the command produces no output. | |
3539 | |
3540 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
3541 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
3542 the mouse. | |
3543 | |
3544 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
3545 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
3546 function and variable names. | |
3547 | |
3548 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
3549 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
3550 file-coding-system-alist. | |
3551 | |
3552 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
3553 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
3554 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
3555 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
3556 according to the current fontset. | |
3557 | |
3558 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
3559 | |
3560 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
3561 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
3562 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
3563 | |
3564 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
3565 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
3566 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
3567 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
3568 | |
3569 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
3570 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
3571 | |
3572 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
3573 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
3574 | |
3575 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
3576 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
3577 command keys. | |
3578 | |
3579 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
3580 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
3581 | |
3582 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
3583 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
3584 all variables that have documentation. | |
3585 | |
3586 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
3587 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
3588 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
3589 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
3590 it should show; the default is 20. | |
3591 | |
3592 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
3593 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
3594 of your input. | |
3595 | |
3596 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
3597 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
3598 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
3599 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
3600 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
3601 Newly added options are included as well. | |
3602 | |
3603 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
3604 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
3605 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
3606 | |
3607 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
3608 Customize menu. | |
3609 | |
3610 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
3611 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
3612 | |
3613 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
3614 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
3615 invoked. | |
3616 | |
3617 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
3618 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
3619 The default is 1. | |
3620 | |
3621 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
3622 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
3623 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
3624 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
3625 sensibly. | |
3626 | |
3627 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
3628 | |
3629 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
3630 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
3631 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
3632 | |
3633 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
3634 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
3635 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
3636 every night. | |
3637 | |
3638 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
3639 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
3640 | |
3641 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
3642 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
3643 | |
3644 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
3645 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
3646 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
3647 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
3648 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
26264 | 3649 made invisible again. |
25853 | 3650 |
3651 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
3652 | |
3653 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
3654 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
3655 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
3656 toggle. | |
3657 | |
3658 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
3659 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
3660 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
3661 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
3662 rmail-default-body-file. | |
3663 | |
3664 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
3665 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
3666 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
3667 | |
3668 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
3669 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
3670 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
3671 | |
3672 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
3673 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
3674 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
3675 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
3676 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
3677 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
3678 | |
3679 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
3680 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
3681 provided by feedmail are: | |
3682 | |
3683 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
3684 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
3685 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
3686 | |
3687 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
3688 be prompted for confirmation | |
3689 | |
3690 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
3691 | |
3692 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
3693 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
3694 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
3695 | |
3696 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
3697 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
3698 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
3699 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
3700 | |
3701 ** Dired changes | |
3702 | |
3703 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
3704 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
3705 | |
3706 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
3707 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
3708 | |
3709 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
3710 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
3711 for a specified regexp. | |
3712 | |
3713 ** VC Changes | |
3714 | |
3715 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
3716 conveniently. | |
3717 | |
3718 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
3719 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
3720 Dired. | |
3721 | |
3722 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
3723 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
3724 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
3725 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
3726 | |
3727 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
3728 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
3729 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
3730 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
3731 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
3732 | |
3733 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
3734 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
3735 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
3736 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
3737 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
3738 | |
3739 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
3740 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
26264 | 3741 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
25853 | 3742 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
3743 | |
3744 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
3745 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
3746 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
3747 | |
3748 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
3749 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
3750 session to resolve them. | |
3751 | |
3752 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
3753 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
3754 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
3755 uses as well). | |
3756 | |
3757 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
3758 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
3759 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
3760 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
3761 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
3762 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
3763 using ediff. | |
3764 | |
3765 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
3766 | |
3767 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
3768 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
3769 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
3770 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
3771 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
3772 | |
3773 ** Frame name display changes | |
3774 | |
3775 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
3776 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
3777 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
3778 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
3779 | |
3780 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
3781 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
3782 menu. | |
3783 | |
3784 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
3785 | |
3786 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
3787 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
3788 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
3789 | |
3790 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
3791 | |
3792 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
3793 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
3794 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
3795 | |
3796 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
3797 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
3798 the following line. | |
3799 | |
3800 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
3801 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
3802 previously sent input. | |
3803 | |
3804 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
3805 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
3806 as the search string. | |
3807 | |
3808 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
3809 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
3810 | |
3811 ** C mode changes | |
3812 | |
3813 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
3814 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
3815 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
26264 | 3816 definition. |
25853 | 3817 |
3818 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
3819 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
3820 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
3821 style is still the default however. | |
3822 | |
3823 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
3824 | |
3825 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
3826 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
3827 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
3828 | |
3829 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
3830 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
3831 | |
3832 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
3833 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
3834 | |
3835 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
3836 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
3837 | |
3838 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
3839 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
3840 | |
3841 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
3842 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
3843 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
3844 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
3845 | |
3846 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
3847 | |
26264 | 3848 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
25853 | 3849 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
3850 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
3851 | |
3852 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
3853 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
3854 expanding dynamically. | |
3855 | |
3856 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
3857 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
3858 | |
3859 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
3860 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
3861 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
3862 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
3863 | |
3864 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
3865 | |
3866 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
3867 | |
3868 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
3869 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
3870 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
3871 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
3872 against the first word in the title. | |
3873 | |
3874 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
3875 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
3876 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
26264 | 3877 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
25853 | 3878 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
26264 | 3879 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
25853 | 3880 |
3881 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
3882 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
3883 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
3884 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
3885 | |
3886 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
3887 | |
3888 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
3889 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
3890 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
3891 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
3892 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
3893 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
3894 | |
3895 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
3896 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
3897 | |
3898 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
3899 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
3900 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | |
3901 | |
3902 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
3903 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
3904 | |
3905 ** Ispell changes. | |
3906 | |
26264 | 3907 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
3908 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
25853 | 3909 are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
3910 | |
3911 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
3912 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
3913 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
3914 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
26264 | 3915 include: |
25853 | 3916 |
3917 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
3918 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
3919 | |
3920 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
3921 | |
3922 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3923 | |
3924 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
3925 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
3926 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
3927 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
3928 | |
3929 *** New recursive parser. | |
3930 | |
3931 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
3932 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
3933 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
3934 | |
3935 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
26264 | 3936 |
25853 | 3937 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
3938 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
3939 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
3940 | |
3941 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
3942 | |
3943 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
3944 | |
3945 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
3946 | |
3947 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
3948 | |
3949 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
3950 | |
3951 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
3952 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
3953 | |
3954 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3955 | |
3956 *** References to external documents. | |
3957 | |
3958 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
3959 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
3960 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
3961 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
3962 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
3963 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
3964 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
3965 | |
3966 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
3967 | |
3968 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
3969 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
3970 | |
3971 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
3972 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
3973 | |
3974 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
3975 | |
3976 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
3977 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
3978 | |
3979 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
3980 | |
3981 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
3982 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
3983 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
3984 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
3985 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
3986 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
3987 more. | |
3988 | |
3989 *** Support for the varioref package | |
3990 | |
3991 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
3992 | |
3993 *** New hooks | |
3994 | |
3995 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
3996 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
3997 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
3998 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
3999 | |
4000 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
4001 | |
4002 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
4003 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
4004 | |
4005 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
4006 | |
4007 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
4008 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
4009 fontified, use | |
4010 | |
4011 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
4012 | |
4013 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
4014 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
4015 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
4016 directories that contain the same file name. | |
4017 | |
4018 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
4019 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
4020 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
4021 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
4022 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
4023 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
4024 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
4025 directory. | |
4026 | |
4027 ** New modes and packages | |
4028 | |
4029 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
4030 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
4031 it, but some do not. | |
4032 | |
4033 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
4034 code. | |
4035 | |
4036 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
4037 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
4038 around in a buffer. | |
4039 | |
4040 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
4041 | |
4042 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
4043 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
4044 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
4045 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
4046 | |
4047 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
4048 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
4049 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
4050 | |
4051 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
4052 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
4053 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
4054 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
4055 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
4056 the like. | |
4057 | |
4058 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
4059 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
4060 | |
4061 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
4062 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
4063 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
4064 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
4065 | |
4066 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
4067 | |
4068 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
4069 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
4070 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
4071 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
4072 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
4073 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
4074 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
4075 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
4076 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
4077 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
4078 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
4079 | |
4080 Platform-specific modes: | |
4081 | |
4082 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
4083 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
4084 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
4085 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
4086 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
4087 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
4088 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
4089 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
4090 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
4091 | |
4092 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
4093 | |
4094 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
4095 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
4096 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
4097 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
4098 | |
4099 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
4100 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
4101 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
4102 | |
4103 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
4104 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
4105 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
4106 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
4107 | |
4108 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
4109 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
4110 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
4111 environment. | |
4112 | |
4113 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
4114 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
4115 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
4116 current input method for reading this one event. | |
4117 | |
4118 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
4119 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
4120 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
4121 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
4122 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
4123 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
4124 | |
4125 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
4126 | |
4127 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
4128 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
4129 | |
4130 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
4131 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
4132 always increases point by 1. | |
4133 | |
4134 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
4135 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
4136 | |
4137 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
4138 | |
4139 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
4140 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
4141 default value changed. For example, | |
4142 | |
4143 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
4144 :type 'integer | |
4145 :group 'foo | |
4146 :version "20.3") | |
4147 | |
26264 | 4148 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
25853 | 4149 :version "20.3") |
4150 | |
4151 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
4152 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
4153 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
4154 `:version' in the top level group. | |
4155 | |
4156 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
4157 | |
4158 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
4159 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
4160 | |
4161 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
4162 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
4163 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
4164 to themselves. | |
4165 | |
4166 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
4167 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
4168 values whatever. | |
4169 | |
4170 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
4171 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
4172 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
4173 | |
4174 ** Frame-local variables. | |
4175 | |
4176 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
4177 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
4178 local bindings for that variable. | |
4179 | |
4180 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
4181 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
4182 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
4183 parameter name. | |
4184 | |
4185 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
4186 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
4187 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
4188 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
4189 | |
4190 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
4191 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
4192 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
4193 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
4194 | |
4195 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
4196 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
4197 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
4198 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
4199 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
4200 | |
4201 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
4202 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
4203 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
4204 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
4205 | |
4206 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
4207 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
4208 | |
4209 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
4210 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
4211 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
4212 | |
4213 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
4214 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
4215 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
4216 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
4217 | |
4218 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
4219 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
4220 empty input. | |
4221 | |
4222 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
4223 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
4224 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
4225 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
4226 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
4227 | |
4228 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
4229 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
4230 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
4231 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
4232 | |
4233 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
4234 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
4235 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
4236 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
4237 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
4238 | |
4239 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
4240 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
4241 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
4242 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
4243 | |
4244 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
4245 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
4246 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
4247 | |
4248 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
4249 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
4250 was directed to display this buffer. | |
4251 | |
4252 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
4253 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
4254 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
4255 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
4256 set-window-configuration. | |
4257 | |
4258 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
4259 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
4260 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
4261 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
4262 | |
4263 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
4264 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
4265 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
4266 | |
4267 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
4268 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
4269 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
4270 | |
4271 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
4272 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
4273 | |
4274 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
4275 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
4276 | |
4277 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
4278 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
4279 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
4280 | |
4281 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
4282 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
4283 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
4284 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
4285 | |
4286 ** Menu changes | |
4287 | |
4288 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
4289 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
4290 better supported. | |
4291 | |
4292 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
4293 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
4294 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
4295 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
4296 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
4297 | |
4298 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
4299 | |
4300 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
4301 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
4302 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
4303 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
4304 | |
4305 The format is: | |
4306 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
4307 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
4308 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
4309 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
4310 The supported properties include | |
4311 | |
4312 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
4313 item is enabled. | |
4314 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
4315 item should appear in the menu. | |
26264 | 4316 :filter FILTER-FN |
25853 | 4317 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
4318 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
4319 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
4320 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
4321 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
4322 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
4323 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
4324 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
4325 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
4326 keyboard binding. | |
4327 :key-sequence nil | |
4328 This means that the command normally has no | |
4329 keyboard equivalent. | |
4330 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
4331 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
4332 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
4333 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
4334 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
4335 | |
4336 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
4337 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
4338 | |
4339 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
4340 | |
4341 ** New event types | |
4342 | |
4343 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
4344 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
4345 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
4346 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
4347 | |
4348 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
4349 | |
4350 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
4351 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
4352 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
4353 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
4354 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
4355 forward, away from the user. | |
4356 | |
4357 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
4358 | |
4359 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
4360 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
4361 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
4362 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
4363 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
4364 | |
4365 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
4366 | |
4367 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
4368 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
4369 that were dragged and dropped. | |
4370 | |
4371 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
4372 | |
4373 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
4374 | |
4375 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
4376 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
4377 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
4378 | |
4379 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
4380 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
4381 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
4382 | |
4383 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
4384 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
4385 | |
4386 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
4387 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
4388 | |
4389 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
4390 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
4391 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
4392 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
4393 | |
4394 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
4395 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
4396 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
4397 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
4398 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
4399 | |
4400 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
4401 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
4402 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
4403 consistent with the new representation. | |
4404 | |
4405 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
4406 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
4407 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
4408 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
4409 | |
4410 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
4411 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
4412 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
4413 | |
4414 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
4415 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
4416 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
4417 | |
4418 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
4419 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
4420 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
4421 | |
4422 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
4423 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
4424 | |
4425 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
4426 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
4427 | |
4428 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
4429 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
4430 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
4431 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
4432 | |
4433 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
4434 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
4435 | |
4436 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
4437 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
4438 buffer or string being searched. | |
4439 | |
4440 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
4441 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
4442 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
4443 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
4444 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
4445 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
4446 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
4447 | |
4448 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
4449 | |
4450 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
4451 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
4452 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
4453 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
4454 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
4455 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
4456 define-coding-system-alias. | |
4457 | |
4458 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
4459 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
4460 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
4461 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
4462 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
4463 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
4464 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
4465 `iso-8859-1'. | |
4466 | |
4467 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
4468 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
4469 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
4470 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
4471 | |
4472 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
4473 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
4474 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
4475 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
4476 | |
4477 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
4478 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
4479 This function requires a user interaction. | |
4480 | |
4481 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
4482 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
4483 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
4484 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
4485 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
4486 select-safe-coding-system. | |
4487 | |
4488 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
4489 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
4490 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
4491 was done. | |
4492 | |
4493 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
4494 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
4495 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
4496 | |
4497 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
4498 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
4499 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
4500 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
4501 | |
4502 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
4503 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
4504 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
4505 converted. | |
4506 | |
4507 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
4508 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
4509 | |
4510 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
4511 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
4512 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
4513 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
4514 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
4515 range of characters. | |
4516 | |
4517 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
4518 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
4519 | |
4520 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
4521 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
4522 | |
4523 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
4524 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
4525 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
4526 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
4527 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
4528 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
4529 | |
4530 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
4531 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
4532 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
4533 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
4534 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
4535 | |
4536 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
4537 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
4538 | |
4539 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
4540 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
4541 | |
4542 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
4543 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
4544 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
4545 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
4546 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
4547 | |
4548 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
4549 | |
4550 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
4551 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
4552 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
4553 tree structure. | |
4554 | |
4555 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
4556 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
4557 | |
4558 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
4559 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
4560 in your .emacs file.) | |
4561 | |
4562 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
4563 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
4564 | |
4565 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
4566 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
4567 | |
4568 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
4569 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
4570 kills the region. | |
4571 | |
4572 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
4573 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
4574 | |
4575 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
4576 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
4577 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
4578 | |
4579 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
4580 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
4581 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
4582 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
4583 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
4584 past.) | |
4585 | |
4586 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
4587 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
4588 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
4589 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
4590 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
4591 | |
4592 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
4593 and is an alias for it. | |
4594 | |
4595 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
4596 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
4597 | |
4598 ** Scrolling changes | |
4599 | |
4600 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
4601 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
4602 | |
4603 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
4604 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
4605 where it started. | |
4606 | |
4607 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
4608 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
4609 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
4610 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
4611 | |
4612 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
4613 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
4614 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
4615 recenters the window. | |
4616 | |
4617 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
4618 | |
4619 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
4620 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
4621 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
4622 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
4623 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
4624 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
4625 | |
4626 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
4627 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
4628 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
4629 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
4630 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
4631 | |
4632 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
4633 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
4634 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
4635 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
4636 | |
4637 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
4638 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
4639 | |
4640 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
4641 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
4642 | |
4643 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
4644 | |
4645 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
4646 | |
4647 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
4648 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
4649 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
4650 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
4651 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
4652 | |
4653 *** Input methods | |
4654 | |
4655 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
4656 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
4657 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
4658 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
4659 support several input methods. | |
4660 | |
4661 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
4662 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
4663 work. | |
4664 | |
4665 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
4666 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
4667 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
4668 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
4669 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
4670 letter. | |
4671 | |
4672 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
4673 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
4674 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
4675 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
4676 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
4677 | |
4678 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
4679 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
4680 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
4681 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
4682 | |
4683 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
4684 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
4685 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
4686 the first guess is wrong. | |
4687 | |
4688 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
4689 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
4690 | |
4691 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
4692 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
4693 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
4694 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
4695 | |
4696 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
4697 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
4698 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
4699 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
4700 | |
4701 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
4702 | |
4703 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
4704 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
4705 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
4706 what you want. | |
4707 | |
4708 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
4709 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
4710 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
4711 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
4712 | |
4713 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
4714 character conversion as well. | |
4715 | |
4716 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
4717 | |
4718 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
4719 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
4720 requires using many fonts. | |
4721 | |
4722 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
4723 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
4724 | |
4725 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
4726 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
4727 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
4728 you would use a font. | |
4729 | |
4730 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
4731 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
4732 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
4733 | |
4734 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
4735 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
4736 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
4737 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
4738 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
4739 | |
4740 *** Defining fontsets. | |
4741 | |
4742 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
4743 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
4744 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
4745 | |
4746 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
4747 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
4748 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
4749 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
4750 | |
4751 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
4752 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
4753 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
4754 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
4755 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
4756 | |
4757 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
4758 The resource value should have this form: | |
4759 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
4760 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
4761 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
4762 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
4763 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
4764 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
4765 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
4766 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | |
4767 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
4768 | |
4769 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
4770 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
4771 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
4772 | |
4773 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
4774 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
4775 following resource, | |
4776 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
4777 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
4778 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
4779 Here is the substitution rule: | |
4780 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
4781 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
4782 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
4783 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
4784 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
4785 | |
4786 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
4787 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
4788 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
4789 | |
4790 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
4791 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
4792 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
4793 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
4794 fontsets. | |
4795 | |
4796 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
4797 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
4798 | |
4799 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
4800 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
4801 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
4802 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
4803 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
4804 system for new files that you create. | |
4805 | |
4806 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
4807 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
4808 whole Emacs session. | |
4809 | |
4810 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
4811 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
4812 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
4813 | |
4814 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
4815 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
4816 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
4817 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
4818 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
4819 | |
4820 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
4821 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
4822 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
4823 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
4824 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
4825 | |
4826 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
4827 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
4828 | |
4829 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
4830 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
4831 | |
4832 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
4833 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
4834 | |
4835 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
4836 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
4837 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
4838 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
4839 of the file. | |
4840 | |
4841 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
4842 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
4843 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
4844 translated into that character code. | |
4845 | |
4846 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
4847 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
4848 | |
4849 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
4850 | |
4851 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
4852 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
4853 | |
4854 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
4855 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
4856 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
4857 | |
4858 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
4859 | |
4860 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
4861 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
4862 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
4863 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
4864 designed to work with terminals. | |
4865 | |
4866 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
4867 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
4868 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
4869 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
4870 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
4871 in the corresponding buffer. | |
4872 | |
4873 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
4874 | |
4875 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
4876 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
4877 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
4878 | |
4879 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
4880 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
4881 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
4882 want to use. | |
4883 | |
4884 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
4885 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
4886 | |
4887 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
4888 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
4889 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
4890 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
4891 | |
4892 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
4893 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
4894 related information. | |
4895 | |
4896 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
4897 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
4898 scripts. | |
4899 | |
4900 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
4901 information about the support for a particular language. | |
4902 You specify the language as an argument. | |
4903 | |
4904 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
4905 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
4906 first dash. | |
4907 | |
4908 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
4909 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
4910 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
4911 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
4912 | |
4913 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
4914 B big5 (Chinese) | |
4915 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
4916 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
4917 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
4918 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
4919 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4920 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
4921 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
4922 R koi8 (Russian) | |
4923 Q tibetan | |
4924 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
4925 T lao | |
4926 T tis620 (Thai) | |
4927 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
4928 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4929 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
4930 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
4931 z hz (Chinese) | |
4932 | |
4933 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
4934 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
4935 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
4936 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
4937 | |
4938 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
4939 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
4940 | |
4941 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
4942 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
4943 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
4944 Rmail files themselves. | |
4945 | |
4946 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
4947 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
4948 | |
4949 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
4950 for sending mail: | |
4951 | |
4952 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
4953 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
4954 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
4955 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
4956 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
4957 | |
4958 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
4959 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
4960 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
4961 translations. | |
4962 | |
4963 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
4964 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
4965 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
4966 without any conversion. | |
4967 | |
4968 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
4969 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
4970 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
4971 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
4972 | |
4973 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
4974 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
4975 | |
4976 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
4977 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
4978 | |
4979 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
4980 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
4981 | |
4982 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
4983 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
4984 in the buffer before point. | |
4985 | |
4986 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
4987 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
4988 you are using. | |
4989 | |
4990 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
4991 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
4992 | |
4993 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
4994 | |
4995 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
4996 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
4997 | |
4998 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
4999 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
5000 can become a bottleneck. | |
5001 | |
5002 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
5003 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
5004 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
5005 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
5006 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
5007 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
5008 | |
5009 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
5010 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
5011 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
5012 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
5013 | |
5014 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
5015 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
5016 show-paren-mode. | |
5017 | |
5018 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
5019 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
5020 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
5021 | |
5022 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
5023 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
5024 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
5025 | |
5026 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
5027 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
5028 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
5029 | |
5030 ** Changes in View mode. | |
5031 | |
5032 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
5033 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
5034 | |
5035 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
5036 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
5037 | |
5038 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
5039 previous state. | |
5040 | |
5041 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
5042 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
5043 | |
5044 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
5045 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
5046 not just the selected window. | |
5047 | |
5048 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
5049 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
5050 turns View mode on or off. | |
5051 | |
5052 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
5053 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
5054 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
5055 | |
5056 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
5057 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
5058 | |
5059 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
5060 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
5061 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
5062 which version to compare with. | |
5063 | |
5064 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
26264 | 5065 blocks if a match is inside the block. |
25853 | 5066 |
5067 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
5068 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
5069 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
5070 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
5071 | |
5072 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
5073 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
5074 blocks, all of them or none. | |
5075 | |
5076 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
5077 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
5078 confirmation first. | |
5079 | |
5080 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
5081 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
5082 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
5083 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
5084 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
5085 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
5086 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
5087 | |
5088 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
5089 | |
5090 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
5091 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
5092 | |
5093 ** M-x occur changes. | |
5094 | |
5095 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
5096 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
5097 | |
5098 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
5099 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
5100 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
5101 | |
5102 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
5103 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
5104 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
5105 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
5106 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
5107 | |
5108 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
5109 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
5110 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
5111 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
5112 | |
5113 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
5114 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
5115 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
5116 | |
5117 ** Outline mode changes. | |
5118 | |
5119 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
5120 | |
5121 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
5122 | |
5123 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
5124 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
5125 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
5126 was already active. | |
5127 | |
5128 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
5129 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
5130 get confused by it. | |
5131 | |
5132 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
5133 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
5134 | |
5135 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
5136 | |
5137 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
5138 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
5139 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
5140 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
5141 | |
5142 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
5143 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
5144 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
5145 | |
5146 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
5147 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
5148 values. | |
5149 | |
5150 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
5151 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
5152 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
5153 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
5154 | |
5155 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
5156 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
5157 can be. The default value is 30. | |
5158 | |
5159 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
5160 | |
5161 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
5162 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
5163 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
5164 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
5165 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
5166 behavior. | |
5167 | |
5168 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
5169 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
5170 | |
5171 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
5172 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
5173 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
5174 buffer that shows the original message. | |
5175 | |
5176 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
5177 with separator lines around the contents. | |
5178 | |
5179 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
5180 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
5181 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
5182 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
5183 | |
5184 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
5185 | |
5186 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
5187 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
5188 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
5189 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
5190 | |
5191 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
5192 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
5193 /etc/passwd. | |
5194 | |
5195 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
5196 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
5197 /etc/passwd. | |
5198 | |
5199 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
5200 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
5201 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
5202 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
5203 | |
5204 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
5205 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
5206 be taken to be magic. | |
5207 | |
5208 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
5209 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
5210 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
5211 | |
5212 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
5213 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
5214 | |
5215 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
5216 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
5217 | |
5218 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
5219 | |
5220 new key dired.el binding old key | |
5221 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
5222 * c dired-change-marks c | |
5223 * m dired-mark m | |
5224 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
5225 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
5226 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
5227 * u dired-unmark u | |
5228 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
5229 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
5230 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
5231 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
5232 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
5233 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
5234 | |
5235 ** Rmail changes. | |
5236 | |
5237 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
5238 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
5239 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
5240 each time you run it. | |
5241 | |
5242 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
5243 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
5244 | |
5245 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
5246 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
5247 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
5248 | |
5249 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
5250 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
5251 | |
5252 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
5253 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
5254 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
5255 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
5256 for output. | |
5257 | |
5258 ** Gnus changes. | |
5259 | |
5260 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
5261 | |
26264 | 5262 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
5263 Gnus. | |
5264 | |
5265 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
25853 | 5266 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
5267 | |
5268 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
5269 article mode line. | |
5270 | |
5271 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
5272 | |
5273 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
5274 | |
5275 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
5276 | |
5277 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
5278 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
5279 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
5280 | |
5281 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
5282 | |
5283 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
5284 | |
5285 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
5286 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
5287 | |
5288 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
5289 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
5290 used to pick articles. | |
5291 | |
5292 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
5293 another have been added. | |
5294 | |
5295 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
5296 | |
5297 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
5298 generating lines in buffers. | |
5299 | |
5300 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
5301 `M-C-_'. | |
5302 | |
5303 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
5304 | |
5305 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
5306 | |
5307 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
5308 | |
5309 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
26264 | 5310 |
25853 | 5311 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
5312 | |
5313 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
5314 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
5315 | |
5316 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
5317 the native server. | |
5318 | |
5319 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
5320 | |
5321 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
5322 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
5323 | |
5324 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
5325 | |
5326 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
5327 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
5328 | |
5329 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
5330 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
5331 | |
5332 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
5333 a group. | |
5334 | |
5335 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
5336 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
5337 | |
5338 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
5339 | |
5340 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
5341 | |
5342 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
5343 | |
5344 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
26264 | 5345 |
25853 | 5346 Use the `Y c' command. |
5347 | |
5348 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
5349 | |
5350 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
5351 | |
5352 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
5353 | |
5354 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
5355 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
26264 | 5356 |
25853 | 5357 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
5358 | |
5359 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
5360 | |
5361 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
5362 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
5363 | |
5364 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
5365 | |
5366 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
5367 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
5368 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
5369 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
5370 this issue.) | |
5371 | |
5372 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
5373 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
5374 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
5375 | |
5376 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5377 | |
5378 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
5379 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
5380 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
5381 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
5382 for reading and posting). | |
5383 | |
5384 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
5385 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5386 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
5387 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
5388 there. | |
5389 | |
5390 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
5391 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
5392 | |
5393 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
5394 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
5395 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
5396 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
5397 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
5398 | |
5399 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
5400 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
5401 | |
5402 ** CC mode changes. | |
5403 | |
5404 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
5405 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
5406 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
5407 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
5408 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
5409 loaded. | |
5410 | |
5411 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
26264 | 5412 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
25853 | 5413 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
26264 | 5414 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
5415 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
25853 | 5416 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
5417 | |
5418 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
5419 of the current buffer. | |
5420 | |
5421 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
5422 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
5423 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
5424 | |
5425 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
5426 style that the Python developers like. | |
5427 | |
5428 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
5429 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
5430 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
5431 | |
5432 ** VC Changes [new] | |
5433 | |
5434 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
5435 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
5436 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
5437 | |
5438 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
5439 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
5440 developers. | |
5441 | |
5442 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
5443 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
5444 | |
5445 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
5446 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
5447 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
5448 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
5449 | |
5450 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
5451 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
5452 | |
5453 ** Calendar changes. | |
5454 | |
5455 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
5456 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
5457 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
5458 | |
5459 ** ps-print changes | |
5460 | |
26264 | 5461 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. |
25853 | 5462 |
5463 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
5464 | |
5465 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
5466 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
5467 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
5468 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
5469 It defaults to `letter'. | |
5470 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
5471 | |
5472 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
26264 | 5473 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, |
25853 | 5474 non-nil means "landscape" mode. |
5475 | |
5476 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
5477 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
26264 | 5478 It defaults to 1. |
25853 | 5479 |
5480 *** Horizontal layout | |
5481 | |
5482 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
5483 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
5484 All are measured in points. | |
5485 | |
5486 *** Vertical layout | |
5487 | |
5488 The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
5489 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
5490 All are measured in points. | |
5491 | |
5492 *** Headers | |
5493 | |
5494 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
5495 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
5496 margin above the text. | |
5497 | |
26264 | 5498 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy |
25853 | 5499 framing box is printed around the header. |
5500 | |
5501 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
5502 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
5503 | |
26264 | 5504 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', |
5505 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
25853 | 5506 `ps-header-font-size'. |
5507 | |
5508 *** Font managing | |
5509 | |
5510 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
5511 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
5512 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
5513 elements to this alist. | |
5514 | |
26264 | 5515 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font |
25853 | 5516 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. |
5517 | |
5518 ** hideshow changes. | |
5519 | |
5520 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
26264 | 5521 C++, ; for lisp). |
25853 | 5522 |
5523 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
5524 | |
5525 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
5526 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
5527 | |
5528 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | |
5529 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
5530 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
5531 | |
5532 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
5533 robust and a lot faster. | |
5534 | |
26264 | 5535 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
25853 | 5536 |
5537 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
5538 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
5539 documentation for more details. | |
5540 | |
5541 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
5542 | |
5543 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
5544 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
5545 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
5546 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
5547 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
5548 | |
5549 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
5550 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
5551 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
5552 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
5553 | |
5554 ** Font Lock mode | |
5555 | |
5556 *** Custom support | |
5557 | |
5558 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
5559 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
5560 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
5561 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
5562 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
5563 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
5564 | |
5565 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
5566 | |
5567 *** Maximum decoration | |
5568 | |
5569 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
5570 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
5571 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
5572 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
5573 to get the old behavior. | |
5574 | |
5575 *** New support | |
5576 | |
5577 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
5578 | |
5579 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
5580 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
5581 | |
5582 *** Configurable support | |
5583 | |
5584 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
5585 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
5586 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
5587 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
5588 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
5589 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
5590 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
5591 | |
5592 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
5593 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
5594 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
5595 | |
5596 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
5597 | |
5598 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
5599 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
5600 for any mode. | |
5601 | |
5602 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
5603 | |
5604 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
5605 | |
5606 in your ~/.emacs. | |
5607 | |
5608 *** New faces | |
5609 | |
5610 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
5611 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
5612 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
5613 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
5614 | |
5615 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
5616 | |
5617 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
5618 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
5619 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
5620 | |
5621 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
5622 | |
5623 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
5624 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
5625 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
5626 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
5627 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
5628 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
5629 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
5630 | |
5631 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
5632 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
5633 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
5634 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
5635 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
5636 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
5637 | |
5638 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
5639 | |
5640 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
5641 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
5642 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
5643 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
5644 | |
5645 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
5646 settings. | |
5647 | |
5648 ** Ada mode changes. | |
5649 | |
5650 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
5651 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
5652 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
5653 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
5654 stubs. | |
5655 | |
5656 *** There are two new commands: | |
5657 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
5658 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
5659 | |
5660 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
5661 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
26264 | 5662 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
25853 | 5663 |
5664 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
5665 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
5666 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
5667 | |
5668 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
5669 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
5670 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
5671 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
5672 | |
5673 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
5674 | |
5675 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
5676 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
5677 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
5678 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
5679 have any effect. | |
5680 | |
5681 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
5682 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
5683 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
5684 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
5685 | |
5686 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
5687 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
5688 | |
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5689 ** Changes to the emacsclient program |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5690 |
27475 | 5691 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
5692 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
5693 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
5694 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
5695 | |
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5696 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
25853 | 5697 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
5698 buffer in Emacs. | |
5699 | |
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5700 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5701 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5702 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5703 option takes precedence. |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5704 |
25853 | 5705 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
5706 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
5707 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
5708 | |
5709 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
5710 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
5711 the current defun. | |
5712 | |
5713 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
5714 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
5715 | |
5716 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
5717 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
5718 necessary). | |
5719 | |
5720 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
5721 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
5722 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
5723 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
5724 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
5725 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
5726 | |
5727 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
5728 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
5729 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
5730 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
5731 | |
5732 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
5733 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
5734 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
5735 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
5736 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
5737 | |
5738 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
5739 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
5740 | |
5741 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
5742 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
5743 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
5744 | |
5745 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
5746 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
5747 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
5748 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
5749 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
5750 | |
5751 ** RefTeX mode | |
5752 | |
5753 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
5754 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
5755 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
5756 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
5757 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
5758 | |
26264 | 5759 C-c ( reftex-label |
25853 | 5760 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
5761 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
5762 | |
5763 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
5764 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
5765 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
5766 | |
5767 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
5768 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
5769 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
5770 | |
5771 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
5772 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
5773 | |
5774 C-c = reftex-toc | |
5775 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
5776 can quickly jump to every section. | |
26264 | 5777 |
25853 | 5778 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
5779 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
5780 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
5781 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
5782 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
5783 | |
5784 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
5785 | |
5786 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
5787 | |
5788 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
5789 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
5790 | |
5791 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
5792 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
5793 | |
5794 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
5795 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
5796 | |
5797 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
5798 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
5799 appropriate functions. | |
5800 | |
5801 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
5802 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
5803 | |
5804 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
5805 been cleaned. | |
5806 | |
5807 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
5808 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
5809 | |
5810 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
5811 shall be delimited. | |
5812 | |
5813 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
5814 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
5815 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
5816 | |
5817 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
5818 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
5819 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
5820 | |
5821 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
5822 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
5823 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
5824 documentation). | |
5825 | |
5826 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
5827 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
5828 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
5829 | |
5830 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
5831 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
5832 | |
5833 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
5834 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
5835 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
5836 | |
5837 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
5838 | |
5839 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
5840 | |
5841 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
5842 from alien sources. | |
5843 | |
5844 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
5845 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
5846 crossref entries. | |
5847 | |
5848 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
5849 region. | |
5850 | |
5851 *** Added support for imenu. | |
5852 | |
5853 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
5854 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
5855 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
5856 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
5857 | |
5858 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
5859 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
5860 | |
5861 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
5862 | |
27136 | 5863 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
27112 | 5864 |
25853 | 5865 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
5866 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
5867 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
5868 as an argument. | |
5869 | |
5870 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
5871 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
5872 | |
5873 ** browse-url changes | |
5874 | |
5875 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
5876 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
5877 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
5878 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
5879 customization variables. | |
5880 | |
5881 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
5882 | |
5883 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
5884 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
5885 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
5886 | |
5887 ** Changes in Ediff | |
5888 | |
5889 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
5890 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
5891 | |
5892 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
5893 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
5894 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
5895 directories). | |
5896 | |
5897 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
5898 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
5899 files in the same directory. | |
5900 | |
5901 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
5902 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
5903 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
5904 | |
5905 ** Changes in Viper | |
5906 | |
5907 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
26264 | 5908 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
25853 | 5909 instead of vip-. |
5910 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
26264 | 5911 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
25853 | 5912 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
5913 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
5914 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
5915 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
5916 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
5917 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
5918 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
5919 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
5920 | |
5921 ** Etags changes. | |
5922 | |
5923 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
5924 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
5925 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
5926 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
5927 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
5928 | |
5929 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
5930 | |
5931 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
5932 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
5933 | |
5934 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
5935 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
5936 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
5937 | |
5938 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
5939 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
5940 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
5941 methods and protocols. | |
5942 | |
5943 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
5944 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
5945 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
5946 paragraph name. | |
5947 | |
5948 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
5949 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
5950 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
5951 | |
5952 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
5953 in files has changed slightly. | |
5954 | |
5955 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
5956 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
5957 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
5958 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
5959 | |
5960 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
5961 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
5962 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
5963 reasons. | |
5964 | |
5965 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
5966 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
5967 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
5968 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
5969 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
5970 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
5971 | |
5972 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
5973 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
5974 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
5975 | |
5976 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
5977 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
5978 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
5979 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
5980 | |
5981 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
5982 details. | |
5983 | |
5984 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
5985 | |
5986 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
5987 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
5988 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
5989 | |
5990 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
5991 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
5992 into Emacs. | |
5993 | |
5994 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
5995 | |
5996 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
5997 | |
5998 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
5999 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
6000 | |
6001 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
6002 | |
6003 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
6004 in shell buffers. | |
6005 | |
6006 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
6007 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
6008 and `elint-defun'. | |
6009 | |
6010 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
6011 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
6012 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
6013 strings or comments. | |
6014 | |
6015 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
6016 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
6017 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
6018 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
6019 at these points. | |
6020 | |
6021 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
6022 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
6023 | |
6024 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
6025 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
6026 | |
6027 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
6028 | |
6029 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
6030 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
6031 | |
6032 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
6033 | |
6034 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
6035 | |
6036 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
6037 | |
6038 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
6039 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
6040 | |
6041 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
6042 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
6043 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
6044 original place after inserting the copy. | |
6045 | |
6046 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
6047 on the buffer. | |
6048 | |
6049 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
6050 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
6051 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
6052 | |
6053 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
6054 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
6055 -or- | |
6056 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
6057 | |
6058 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
6059 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
6060 | |
6061 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
6062 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
6063 | |
6064 *** ogonek | |
6065 | |
6066 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
6067 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
6068 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
6069 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
6070 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
6071 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
6072 instance) and vice versa. | |
6073 | |
6074 To use this package load it using | |
6075 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
6076 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
26264 | 6077 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
25853 | 6078 M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
6079 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
6080 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
6081 | |
6082 *** Interface to ph. | |
6083 | |
6084 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
6085 | |
6086 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
6087 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
6088 these servers. | |
6089 | |
6090 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
6091 | |
6092 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
6093 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
6094 while the real cursor does not move. | |
6095 | |
6096 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
6097 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
6098 | |
6099 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
6100 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
6101 | |
6102 ** movemail change | |
6103 | |
6104 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
6105 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
6106 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
6107 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
6108 | |
6109 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
6110 | |
6111 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
6112 | |
6113 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
6114 | |
6115 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
6116 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
6117 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
6118 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
6119 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
6120 | |
6121 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
6122 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
6123 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
6124 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
6125 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
6126 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
6127 | |
6128 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
6129 | |
6130 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
6131 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
6132 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
6133 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
6134 | |
6135 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
6136 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
6137 | |
6138 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
6139 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
6140 "win". | |
6141 | |
6142 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
6143 | |
6144 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
6145 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
6146 | |
6147 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
6148 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
6149 or by the user. | |
6150 | |
6151 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
6152 | |
6153 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
6154 | |
6155 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
6156 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
6157 | |
6158 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
6159 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
6160 its argument. | |
6161 | |
6162 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
6163 | |
6164 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
6165 | |
6166 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
6167 | |
6168 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
6169 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
6170 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
6171 `format' function. | |
6172 | |
6173 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
6174 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
6175 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
6176 | |
6177 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
6178 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
6179 adding one of these suffixes. | |
6180 | |
6181 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
6182 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
26264 | 6183 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
25853 | 6184 |
6185 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
6186 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
6187 | |
6188 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
6189 | |
6190 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
6191 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
6192 | |
6193 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
6194 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
6195 | |
6196 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
6197 | |
6198 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
6199 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
6200 | |
6201 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
6202 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
6203 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
6204 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
6205 | |
6206 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
6207 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
6208 of the last form. | |
6209 | |
6210 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
6211 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
6212 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
6213 as the last form. | |
6214 | |
6215 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
6216 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
6217 matches. | |
6218 | |
6219 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
6220 | |
6221 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
6222 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
6223 Then it returns that string. | |
6224 | |
6225 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
6226 | |
6227 (with-output-to-string | |
6228 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
6229 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
6230 | |
6231 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
6232 | |
6233 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
6234 is non-nil. | |
6235 | |
6236 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
6237 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
6238 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
6239 | |
6240 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
6241 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
6242 | |
6243 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
6244 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
6245 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
6246 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
6247 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
6248 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
6249 | |
6250 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
6251 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
6252 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
6253 characters". | |
6254 | |
6255 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
6256 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
6257 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
6258 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
6259 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
6260 | |
6261 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
6262 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
6263 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
6264 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
6265 | |
6266 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
6267 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
6268 | |
6269 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
26264 | 6270 |
25853 | 6271 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
6272 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
6273 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
6274 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
6275 guaranteed. | |
6276 | |
6277 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
6278 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
6279 character). | |
6280 | |
6281 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
6282 | |
6283 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
6284 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
6285 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
6286 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
6287 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
6288 | |
6289 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
6290 | |
6291 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
6292 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
6293 more than the number of characters. | |
6294 | |
6295 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
6296 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
6297 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
6298 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
6299 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
6300 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
6301 | |
6302 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
6303 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
6304 | |
6305 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
6306 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
6307 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
6308 character, sref signals an error. | |
6309 | |
6310 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
6311 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
6312 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
6313 | |
6314 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
6315 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
6316 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
6317 | |
6318 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
6319 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
6320 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
6321 | |
6322 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
6323 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
6324 | |
6325 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
6326 | |
6327 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
6328 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
6329 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
6330 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
6331 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
6332 | |
6333 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
6334 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
6335 | |
6336 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
6337 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
6338 | |
6339 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
6340 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
6341 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
6342 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
6343 | |
6344 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
6345 | |
6346 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
6347 | |
6348 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
6349 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
6350 are not included in the resulting value. | |
6351 | |
6352 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
6353 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
6354 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
6355 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
6356 | |
6357 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
6358 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
6359 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
6360 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
6361 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
6362 column START-COLUMN. | |
6363 | |
6364 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
6365 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
6366 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
6367 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
6368 changed text, before the change. | |
6369 | |
6370 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
6371 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
6372 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
6373 | |
6374 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
6375 | |
6376 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
6377 | |
6378 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
6379 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
6380 | |
6381 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
6382 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
6383 which identify the character within that character set. | |
6384 | |
6385 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
6386 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
6387 opposite of split-char. | |
6388 | |
6389 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
6390 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
6391 | |
6392 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
6393 of all the characters in a string. | |
6394 | |
6395 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
6396 and specifying coding systems. | |
6397 | |
6398 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
6399 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
6400 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
6401 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
6402 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
6403 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
6404 | |
6405 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
6406 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
6407 | |
6408 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
6409 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
6410 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
6411 | |
6412 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
6413 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
6414 to match against a file name. | |
6415 | |
6416 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
6417 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
6418 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
6419 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
6420 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
6421 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
6422 | |
6423 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
6424 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
6425 | |
6426 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
6427 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
6428 | |
6429 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
6430 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
6431 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
6432 service names. | |
6433 | |
6434 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
6435 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
6436 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
6437 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
6438 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
6439 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
6440 | |
6441 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
6442 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
6443 | |
6444 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
6445 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
6446 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
6447 start the subprocess. | |
6448 | |
6449 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
6450 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
6451 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
6452 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
6453 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
6454 | |
6455 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
6456 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
6457 subprocess. | |
6458 | |
6459 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
6460 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
6461 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
6462 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
6463 | |
6464 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
6465 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
6466 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
6467 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
6468 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
6469 system for one operation at a time. | |
6470 | |
6471 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
6472 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
6473 | |
6474 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
6475 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
6476 The value is a cons cell, | |
6477 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
6478 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
6479 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
6480 input to the subprocess. | |
6481 | |
6482 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
6483 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
6484 | |
6485 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
6486 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
6487 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
6488 | |
6489 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
6490 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
6491 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
6492 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
6493 customization. | |
6494 | |
6495 Thus, instead of writing | |
6496 | |
6497 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
6498 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
6499 | |
6500 you would now write this: | |
6501 | |
6502 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
6503 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
6504 :type 'boolean | |
6505 :group foo) | |
6506 | |
6507 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
6508 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
6509 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
6510 for a description of them. | |
6511 | |
6512 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
6513 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
6514 | |
6515 (defgroup ispell nil | |
6516 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
6517 :group 'processes) | |
6518 | |
6519 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
6520 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
6521 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
6522 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
6523 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
6524 | |
6525 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
6526 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
6527 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
6528 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
6529 first-level subgroups. | |
6530 | |
6531 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
6532 | |
6533 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
6534 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
6535 | |
6536 ** easy-mmode | |
6537 | |
6538 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
6539 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
6540 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
6541 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
6542 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
6543 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
6544 | |
6545 ** Text property changes | |
6546 | |
6547 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
6548 text property. | |
6549 | |
6550 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
6551 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
6552 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
6553 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
6554 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
6555 | |
6556 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
6557 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
6558 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
6559 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
6560 | |
6561 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
6562 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
6563 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
6564 | |
6565 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
6566 | |
6567 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
6568 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
6569 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
6570 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
6571 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
6572 make the overlay visible. | |
6573 | |
6574 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
6575 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
6576 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
6577 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
6578 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
6579 t when it should hide it. | |
6580 | |
6581 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
6582 | |
6583 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
26264 | 6584 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
6585 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
25853 | 6586 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
26264 | 6587 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
25853 | 6588 Here is an example of how to do this: |
6589 | |
6590 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
26264 | 6591 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
25853 | 6592 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
26264 | 6593 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
25853 | 6594 |
6595 ... | |
6596 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
6597 | |
6598 ... | |
6599 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
6600 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
6601 ;; Or respectively: | |
6602 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
6603 | |
6604 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
6605 | |
6606 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
6607 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
6608 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
6609 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
6610 | |
6611 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
6612 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
6613 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
6614 | |
6615 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
6616 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
6617 | |
6618 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
6619 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
6620 | |
6621 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
6622 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
6623 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
6624 | |
6625 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
6626 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
6627 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
6628 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
6629 | |
6630 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
6631 of the current buffer. | |
6632 | |
6633 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
6634 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
6635 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
6636 | |
6637 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
6638 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
6639 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
6640 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
6641 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
6642 | |
6643 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
6644 text property. | |
6645 | |
6646 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
6647 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
6648 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
6649 | |
6650 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
6651 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
6652 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
6653 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
6654 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
6655 | |
6656 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
6657 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
6658 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
6659 | |
6660 ** Changes in face features | |
6661 | |
6662 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
6663 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
6664 | |
6665 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
6666 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
6667 | |
6668 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
6669 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
6670 | |
6671 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
6672 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
6673 | |
6674 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
6675 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
6676 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
6677 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
6678 overlay property). | |
6679 | |
6680 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
6681 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
6682 | |
6683 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
6684 | |
6685 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
6686 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
6687 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
6688 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
6689 | |
6690 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
6691 begins with ~. | |
6692 | |
6693 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
6694 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
6695 | |
6696 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
6697 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
6698 | |
6699 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
6700 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
6701 | |
6702 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
6703 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
6704 | |
6705 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
6706 (formerly it did not). | |
6707 | |
6708 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
6709 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
6710 | |
6711 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
6712 instead of constant strings. | |
6713 | |
6714 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
6715 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
6716 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
6717 | |
6718 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
6719 in the same way as before. | |
6720 | |
6721 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
6722 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
6723 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
6724 | |
6725 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
6726 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
6727 else, and returns nil. | |
6728 | |
6729 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
6730 directory cannot be listed. | |
6731 | |
6732 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
6733 | |
6734 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
6735 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
6736 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
6737 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
6738 ways: | |
6739 | |
6740 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
6741 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
6742 | |
6743 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
6744 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
6745 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
6746 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
6747 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
6748 | |
6749 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
6750 argument in this way. | |
6751 | |
6752 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
6753 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
6754 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
6755 | |
6756 ** Echo area features | |
6757 | |
6758 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
6759 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
6760 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
6761 after the echo area is cleared. | |
6762 | |
6763 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
6764 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
6765 | |
6766 ** Keyboard input features | |
6767 | |
6768 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
6769 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
6770 | |
6771 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
6772 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
6773 by keyboard macros. | |
6774 | |
6775 ** Frame-related changes | |
6776 | |
6777 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
6778 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
6779 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
6780 | |
6781 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
6782 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
6783 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
6784 | |
6785 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
6786 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
6787 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
6788 in the selected frame. | |
6789 | |
6790 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
6791 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
6792 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
6793 | |
6794 ** X Windows features | |
6795 | |
6796 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
6797 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
6798 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
6799 | |
6800 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
6801 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
6802 | |
6803 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
6804 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
6805 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
6806 | |
6807 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
6808 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
6809 | |
6810 ** Subprocess features | |
6811 | |
6812 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
6813 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
6814 automatically. | |
6815 | |
6816 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
6817 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
6818 | |
6819 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
6820 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
6821 | |
6822 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
6823 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
6824 | |
6825 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
6826 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
6827 goes after the other menu items. | |
6828 | |
6829 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
26264 | 6830 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
25853 | 6831 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
6832 are in use. | |
6833 | |
6834 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
6835 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
6836 | |
6837 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
6838 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
6839 form. | |
6840 | |
6841 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
6842 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
6843 but its hook is still run. | |
6844 | |
6845 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
6846 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
6847 | |
6848 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
6849 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
6850 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
6851 | |
6852 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
6853 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
6854 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
6855 warned. | |
6856 | |
6857 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
6858 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
6859 | |
6860 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
6861 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
6862 functions like display-time. | |
6863 | |
6864 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
6865 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
6866 | |
6867 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
6868 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
6869 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
6870 | |
6871 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
6872 if there is an error in compilation. | |
6873 | |
6874 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
6875 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
6876 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
6877 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
6878 | |
6879 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
6880 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
6881 the *scratch* buffer. | |
6882 | |
6883 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
6884 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
6885 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
6886 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
6887 | |
6888 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
6889 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
6890 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
6891 | |
6892 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
6893 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
6894 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
6895 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
6896 | |
6897 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
6898 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
6899 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
6900 | |
6901 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
6902 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
6903 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
6904 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
6905 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
6906 files at all. | |
6907 | |
6908 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
6909 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
6910 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
6911 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
6912 | |
6913 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
6914 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
6915 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
6916 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
6917 | |
6918 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
6919 | |
6920 ** imenu.el changes. | |
6921 | |
6922 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
26264 | 6923 item from menu created by imenu. |
25853 | 6924 |
6925 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
6926 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
6927 select one of those items. | |
6928 | |
6929 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
6930 | |
6931 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
6932 | |
6933 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
6934 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
6935 | |
6936 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
6937 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
6938 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
6939 | |
6940 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
6941 | |
6942 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
6943 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
6944 | |
6945 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6946 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
6947 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
6948 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
6949 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
6950 all caps. | |
6951 | |
6952 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
6953 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
6954 | |
6955 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
6956 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
6957 as in previous Emacs versions. | |
6958 | |
6959 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
6960 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
6961 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
6962 frames. | |
6963 | |
6964 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
6965 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
6966 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
6967 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
6968 accident. | |
6969 | |
6970 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
6971 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
6972 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
6973 line and then executing the macro. | |
6974 | |
6975 This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
6976 | |
6977 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
6978 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
6979 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
6980 characters. | |
6981 | |
6982 ** Font Lock mode | |
6983 | |
6984 *** Font Lock support modes | |
6985 | |
6986 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
6987 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
6988 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
6989 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
6990 Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
6991 | |
6992 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
6993 | |
6994 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
6995 | |
6996 in your ~/.emacs. | |
6997 | |
6998 *** lazy-lock | |
6999 | |
7000 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
7001 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
7002 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
7003 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
7004 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
7005 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
7006 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
7007 | |
7008 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
7009 | |
7010 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
7011 | |
7012 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | |
7013 | |
7014 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7015 | |
7016 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
7017 paren and key. | |
7018 | |
7019 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
7020 supported. | |
7021 | |
7022 ** Gnus changes. | |
7023 | |
7024 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
7025 commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
7026 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
7027 previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
7028 | |
7029 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
7030 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
7031 | |
26264 | 7032 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
25853 | 7033 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
7034 obsolete. | |
7035 | |
7036 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
7037 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
7038 | |
7039 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
7040 | |
7041 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
7042 | |
7043 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
7044 | |
7045 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
26264 | 7046 referred. |
25853 | 7047 |
7048 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
7049 | |
7050 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
7051 | |
7052 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
7053 | |
7054 (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
7055 | |
7056 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
26264 | 7057 buffers. |
25853 | 7058 |
7059 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
7060 | |
7061 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
7062 | |
7063 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
7064 | |
7065 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
7066 | |
7067 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
7068 | |
7069 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
7070 | |
7071 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
7072 | |
7073 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
7074 is possible. | |
7075 | |
7076 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
7077 | |
7078 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
7079 groups of groups. | |
7080 | |
7081 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
7082 | |
7083 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
26264 | 7084 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
25853 | 7085 |
7086 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
7087 | |
7088 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
7089 | |
7090 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
7091 | |
7092 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
7093 | |
7094 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
7095 expiration times. | |
7096 | |
7097 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
7098 | |
7099 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
7100 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
7101 | |
7102 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
7103 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
7104 bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
7105 | |
7106 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
7107 articles with the `*' command. | |
7108 | |
7109 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
7110 | |
7111 *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
7112 | |
7113 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
7114 | |
7115 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
7116 | |
26264 | 7117 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
25853 | 7118 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
7119 | |
7120 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
26264 | 7121 buffer. |
25853 | 7122 |
7123 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
7124 | |
7125 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
7126 | |
7127 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
7128 | |
7129 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
7130 | |
26264 | 7131 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
25853 | 7132 |
7133 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
7134 | |
26264 | 7135 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
25853 | 7136 |
7137 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
7138 | |
26264 | 7139 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
7140 | |
7141 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | |
25853 | 7142 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
7143 | |
7144 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
26264 | 7145 refetching. |
25853 | 7146 |
7147 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
7148 | |
7149 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
7150 buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
7151 | |
7152 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
7153 | |
7154 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
7155 | |
7156 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
7157 | |
7158 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
26264 | 7159 articles. |
25853 | 7160 |
7161 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
7162 | |
26264 | 7163 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
25853 | 7164 |
7165 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
7166 cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
7167 | |
7168 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
7169 | |
7170 *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
7171 | |
7172 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
7173 | |
7174 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
7175 | |
7176 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
7177 | |
7178 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
7179 in greater detail. | |
7180 | |
7181 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
7182 | |
7183 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
7184 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
7185 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
7186 exists. | |
7187 | |
7188 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
7189 as well as lists. | |
7190 | |
7191 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
7192 of a given keymap. | |
7193 | |
7194 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
7195 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
7196 keymap or nil. | |
7197 | |
7198 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
7199 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
7200 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
7201 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
7202 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
7203 alias. | |
7204 | |
7205 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
7206 | |
7207 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
7208 | |
7209 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
7210 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
7211 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
7212 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
7213 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
7214 | |
7215 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
7216 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
7217 `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
7218 | |
7219 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
7220 | |
7221 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
7222 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
7223 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
7224 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
7225 chapter of the manual for details. | |
7226 | |
7227 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
7228 customization variables take effect. | |
7229 | |
7230 ** Marking with the mouse. | |
7231 | |
7232 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
7233 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
7234 using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
7235 | |
7236 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
7237 | |
7238 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
7239 | |
7240 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
7241 to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
7242 | |
7243 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
7244 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
7245 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
7246 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
7247 applications, these problems are significant. | |
7248 | |
7249 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
7250 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
7251 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
7252 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
7253 other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
7254 | |
7255 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
7256 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
7257 | |
7258 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
7259 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
7260 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
7261 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
7262 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
7263 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
7264 | |
7265 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
7266 | |
7267 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
7268 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
7269 minibuffer contains. | |
7270 | |
7271 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
7272 | |
7273 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
7274 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
7275 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
7276 affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
7277 | |
7278 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
7279 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
7280 and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
7281 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
7282 | |
7283 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
7284 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
7285 | |
7286 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
7287 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
7288 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
7289 | |
7290 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
7291 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
7292 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
7293 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
7294 | |
7295 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
7296 | |
7297 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
7298 to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
7299 | |
7300 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
7301 | |
7302 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
7303 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
7304 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
7305 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
7306 immediately after the selected one. | |
7307 | |
7308 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
7309 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
7310 | |
7311 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
7312 | |
7313 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
7314 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
7315 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
7316 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
7317 recover-session. | |
7318 | |
7319 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
7320 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
7321 will not work. | |
7322 | |
7323 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
7324 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
7325 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
7326 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
7327 now that the bug is fixed. | |
7328 | |
7329 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
7330 | |
7331 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
7332 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
7333 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
7334 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
7335 | |
7336 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
7337 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
7338 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
7339 the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
7340 | |
7341 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
7342 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
7343 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
7344 | |
7345 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
7346 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
7347 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
7348 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
7349 remain normal. | |
7350 | |
7351 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
7352 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
7353 | |
7354 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
7355 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
7356 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
7357 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
7358 | |
7359 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
7360 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
7361 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
7362 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
7363 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
7364 `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
7365 | |
7366 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
7367 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
7368 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
7369 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
7370 | |
7371 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
7372 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
7373 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
7374 | |
7375 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
7376 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
7377 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
7378 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
7379 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
7380 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
7381 to a limitation in font-lock). | |
7382 | |
7383 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
7384 | |
7385 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
7386 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
7387 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
7388 this example: | |
7389 | |
7390 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
7391 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
7392 | |
7393 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7394 | |
7395 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
7396 | |
7397 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
7398 | |
7399 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
7400 | |
7401 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
7402 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
7403 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
7404 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
7405 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
7406 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
7407 | |
7408 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
7409 does the same job. | |
7410 | |
7411 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
7412 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
7413 | |
7414 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
7415 text. | |
7416 | |
7417 ** Font Lock mode | |
7418 | |
7419 *** Global Font Lock mode | |
7420 | |
7421 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
7422 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
7423 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
7424 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
7425 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
7426 | |
7427 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
7428 | |
7429 (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
7430 | |
7431 in your ~/.emacs. | |
7432 | |
7433 *** Local Refontification | |
7434 | |
7435 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
7436 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
7437 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
7438 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
7439 | |
7440 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
7441 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
7442 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
7443 above and below point. | |
7444 | |
7445 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
7446 | |
7447 ** Follow mode | |
7448 | |
7449 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
7450 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
7451 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
7452 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
7453 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
7454 follow-mode. | |
7455 | |
7456 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
7457 | |
7458 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
7459 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
7460 | |
7461 ** hide-show changes. | |
7462 | |
7463 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
7464 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
7465 normal hooks. | |
7466 | |
7467 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
7468 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
7469 | |
7470 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
7471 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | |
7472 those that begin a function, record, or macro. | |
7473 | |
7474 ** MSDOS Changes | |
7475 | |
7476 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
7477 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
7478 | |
7479 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
7480 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
7481 | |
7482 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
7483 | |
7484 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
7485 pressing both mouse buttons. | |
7486 | |
7487 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
7488 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
26264 | 7489 are: |
25853 | 7490 |
7491 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
7492 now works. | |
7493 | |
7494 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
7495 | |
7496 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
7497 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
7498 | |
7499 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
7500 | |
7501 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
7502 | |
7503 **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
7504 | |
7505 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
7506 | |
7507 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
7508 | |
7509 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
7510 | |
7511 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
7512 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
7513 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
7514 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
7515 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
7516 | |
7517 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
7518 | |
7519 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
7520 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
7521 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
7522 be different. | |
7523 | |
7524 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
7525 than `system-type'. | |
7526 | |
7527 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
7528 | |
7529 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
7530 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
7531 | |
7532 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
7533 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
7534 | |
7535 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
7536 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
7537 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
7538 | |
7539 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
7540 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
7541 like this: | |
7542 | |
7543 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
7544 | |
7545 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
7546 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
7547 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
7548 | |
7549 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
7550 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
7551 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
7552 | |
7553 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
7554 up if too much time passes. | |
7555 | |
7556 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
7557 | |
7558 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
7559 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
7560 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
7561 form in BODY. | |
7562 | |
7563 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
7564 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
7565 call looks like this: | |
7566 | |
7567 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
7568 | |
7569 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
7570 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
7571 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
7572 ARGS. | |
7573 | |
7574 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
7575 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
7576 command. | |
7577 | |
7578 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
7579 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
7580 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
7581 each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
7582 | |
7583 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
7584 idle for SECS seconds. | |
7585 | |
7586 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
7587 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
7588 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
7589 instead. | |
7590 | |
7591 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
7592 there is no answer within a certain time. | |
7593 | |
7594 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
7595 | |
7596 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
7597 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
7598 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
7599 | |
7600 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
7601 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
7602 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
7603 arguments in between are ignored. | |
7604 | |
7605 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
7606 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
7607 | |
7608 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
7609 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
7610 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
7611 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
7612 version. | |
7613 | |
7614 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
7615 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
7616 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
7617 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
7618 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
7619 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
7620 | |
7621 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
7622 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
7623 systems with limited file name syntax. | |
7624 | |
7625 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
7626 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
7627 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
7628 completions.el: | |
7629 | |
7630 (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
7631 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
7632 "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
7633 | |
7634 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
7635 depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
7636 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
7637 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
7638 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
7639 | |
7640 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
7641 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
7642 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
7643 | |
7644 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
7645 marker from its buffer position. | |
7646 | |
7647 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
7648 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
7649 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
7650 | |
7651 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
7652 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
7653 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
7654 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
7655 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
7656 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
7657 | |
7658 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
7659 errors that happen often during editing. | |
7660 | |
7661 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
7662 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
7663 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
7664 | |
7665 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
7666 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
7667 | |
7668 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
7669 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
7670 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
7671 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
7672 and not get-buffer-window. | |
7673 | |
7674 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
7675 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
7676 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
7677 | |
7678 If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
7679 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
7680 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
7681 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
7682 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
7683 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
7684 over and over for the same text. | |
7685 | |
7686 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
7687 | |
7688 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
7689 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
7690 | |
7691 ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
7692 ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
7693 | |
7694 in addition to the normal | |
7695 | |
7696 ;; HEADER: text | |
7697 | |
7698 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
7699 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
7700 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
7701 | |
7702 * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7703 | |
7704 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
7705 Copyright information: | |
7706 | |
27200 | 7707 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 7708 |
7709 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
7710 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
7711 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
7712 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
7713 | |
7714 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
7715 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
7716 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
7717 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
7718 | |
7719 Local variables: | |
7720 mode: outline | |
7721 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
7722 end: |